Home

Fujitsu J2X1-7611-03ENZ0 User's Manual

1. For SPARC Enterprise Servers Note that in this case there is no need to set the hardware information again G Note When registering an agent and performing backups of system images or cloning images perform one of the following Restart the managed server after reconfiguring the hardware properties 53 Restart the related services described in 2 2 Starting and Stopping an Agent 9 3 2 Replacing Servers This section details the procedure to follow when replacing servers A Information Follow the same procedure when replacing servers where VM hosts are running No specific action is required in Resource Orchestrator when replacing admin servers or HBA address rename setup service servers 006006009009092909090000090999090000090909099090000009090909909909090000090999090000090909090000000909090909900000090990000000999099099090000909999 For Rack Mount and Tower Servers Replacing a Server Assigned with Spare Servers Use the following procedure to switch applications over to a spare server and replace a server with minimal interruption Perform Server Switchover Switch over the server to replace with its spare server For server switchover refer to Chapter 4 Server Switchover in the Operation Guide VE The server to replace is automatically powered off after switchover 2 Replace the Server Replace the server Change the BIOS settings of the replacement server to match the operating environment Fo
2. 5 Category code Specify the product category using following codes cpu CPU cpu clock CPU clock memory memory capacity vm virtual L Server 118 pm physical L Server disk extension disk capacity template template Resource identifier No Specify information to identify the accounting target resource with 128 or less alphanumeric characters Resource identifiers vary by the category 2 cpu cpu clock memory VM pool name or sever pool name vm virtual L Server image name pm physical L Server image name disk storage pool name template template ID 7 Unit code No Specify accounting unit using following codes year yearly month monthly hour hourly Unit price No Specify unit price Specify 11 or less digits for the integer portion and 4 or less digit for the fractional portion Specify the fractional currency unit ex cent as 1 for U S dollar euro or Singapore dollar Specify the currency unit as 1 for Japanese yen 3 Example Specify 23 if the setting value is 0 23 Specify 23 if the setting value is Y23 9 Prdwtmme No Specify the name to distinguish the products using 128 or less characters 10 Description Yes Specify the description of the product using 1024 or less characters A comma that follows the name must be entered even when the specification is omitted Example Unit price Product name An example of description is shown below assuming followi
3. An infrastructure administrator recognizes changing state of a network device in one of following cases Report of an error from other administrator or user Detection of changing state when confirming system using the ROR console The event logs to show the changing port state of network devices are output If a port status change on a registered network device is detected the message number 22784 will be output If the port status is down or unknown and that change was not caused by the infrastructure administrator it indicates a problem with the network device Check the network device Status icons of resources on the network device tree are changed to a status other than normal Detection of changing state by software for network management An infrastructure administrator checks the status of the network device and takes corrective action if the problem can be solved If the problem cannot be solved by the infrastructure administrator notification of the following information is sent to the network device administrator requesting solving of the problem 99 Network device name in which the changing state occurred Network device status Phenomenon noticed when receiving requests for confirmation from other administrator or user 11 4 1 Identification of Error Locations This section explains how to identify the network device on which an error has occurred 11 4 1 1 When Notified of an Error by a Tenant Adminis
4. Point When using the Create Basic Task Wizard execution for a time interval shorter than one day cannot be set so once the task has been registered for a different frequency change the properties 60606060620009200900000009909090000909090990909000000909099099000000909990000009090909090900000090092909000000999909000009990900006099299 1 From the Windows Start menu select Administrative Tools Task Scheduler to start the Task Scheduler 2 To manage tasks hierarchically use the following procedure to create a folder a From the Task Scheduler menu after selecting Task Scheduler Library select Actions New Folder and then enter a folder name in the dialog box that is displayed and click the OK button b Selecting the created folder and then creating another folder by selecting Actions New Folder from the Task Scheduler menu allows a further hierarchical level to be added Point Creating a folder in Task Manager allows tasks to be managed hierarchically In cases such as where multiple tasks are to be registered creating a folder allows task management to be performed efficiently 3 From the Task Scheduler menu select Actions Create Basic Task to display the Create Basic Task Wizard Point When a subsequent operation is performed after any folder is selected the task will be registered under that folder If a folder is not selected the task will be registered in the Task Scheduler Library 060606
5. 0 20 30 53 Starting BX620 1 21 BX620 1 473 snap l servers create 2011 03 10 21 15 06 250 ad 0 420 304 53 Error BX620 1 21 BX620 1_473 snap l_servers create 2011 03 10 21 26 05 953 0 20 30 73 Starting BX620 1 25 BX620 1 510 snap l servers create 2011 03 10 21 29 21 150 042043073 Completed BX620 1_25 BX620 1_510 snap l_servers create 2011 05 10 29 15 39 750 admin 0 20 30 53 Starting BX620 1_35 BX620 1_510 snap server_images snapshot 2011 03 10 23 15 46 781 admin 02033053 Completed BX620 1_35 BX620 1_510 snap server_images snapshot 2011 03 10 23 16 23 625 admin 0 20 30 53 Starting BX620 1_36 BX620 1_510 snap server_images restore 2011 03 10 23 16 28 484 admin 0 20 30 53 Completed BX620 1 36 BX620 1 510 snap Server images restore 2011 03 10 23 17 00 859 admin 0 20 30 53 Starting BX620 1 37 BX620 1 510 snap Server images destroy 2011 03 10 23 17 04 718 admin 0 20 30 53 Completed BX620 1 37 BX620 1 510 snap Server images destroy 2011 03 10 23 19 25 734 admin 0 20 30 53 Starting BX620 1 38 BX620 1 744 image test server images create 2011 03 10 23 27 29 640 admin 0 20 30 53 Completed BX620 1 38 BX620 1 744 image test server images create 136 2011 03 10 23 42 37 171 admin 020430553 Starting BX620 1 40 BX620 1 578 image test Server images destroy 2011 03 10 23 42 47 460 admin 02053053 Completed BX620 1_40 BX620 1_
6. HBA address rename setup service The service that starts managed servers that use HBA address rename in the event of failure of the admin server HBAAR HBA address rename I O virtualization technology that enables changing of the actual WWN possessed by an HBA host affinity A definition of the server HBA that is set for the CA port of the storage device and the accessible area of storage It is a function for association of the Logical Volume inside the storage which is shown to the host HBA that also functions as security internal to the storage device Hyper V Virtualization software from Microsoft Corporation Provides a virtualized infrastructure on PC servers enabling flexible management of operations I O virtualization option An optional product that is necessary to provide I O virtualization The WWNN address and MAC address provided is guaranteed by Fujitsu Limited to be unique Necessary when using HBA address rename 192 IBP Intelligent Blade Panel One of operation modes used for PRIMERGY switch blades This operation mode can be used for coordination with ServerView Virtual I O Manager VIOM and relations between server blades and switch blades can be easily and safely configured ICT governance A collection of principles and practices that encourage desirable behavior in the use of ICT Information and Communication Technology based on an evaluation of the impacts and risks posed in the adoption a
7. When a network device administrator has modified the configuration Check if the configuration modification is necessary When the configuration modification is not necessary The infrastructure administrator must log in to the firewall directly and delete or modify the problem causing configuration such as rejection of communication packets When configuration modifications were necessary based on the system operation policy Review if the details of scripts parameter files and interface configuration files are based on the operation policy 11 4 2 2 When a Firewall Changing State is Detected during Status Confirmation Using the ROR Console Use the following procedure to confirm the status of the firewall 1 Select the network device of firewall on which changing state occurs from the network device tree Select the Resource Details tab 2 3 4 Confirm the status of the firewall Identify the L Platform in use a Confirm the name of the firewall allocated using auto configuration by checking the items in displayed results of the rexadm netdevice show command AllocatedResources Firewall b Confirm the name of the L Platform using the firewall by checking the items in displayed results of the rcxadm firewall show command L Platform Name Specify the firewall name confirmed in a as the firewall name to be specified for the name option Confirmation procedure after this refer to the operation after st
8. 2 Select the Resource Details tab 3 Confirm the displayed detailed information When there is a link of Launch Network Device Web UI in Hardware Details a Click the link and start the L2 switch management screen b Confirm event logs or status from the started management window and check the error detected by the L2 switch When there is no link of Launch Network Device Web UI in Hardware Details Confirm the following information displayed in the Main Panel Basic Information Device Status The status of the L2 switch is displayed When the status is something other than normal it indicates that an error might have occurred Port Information Link Status The status of the port of the L2 switch is displayed When the status is something other than up it indicates that a port error might have occurred 4 Take corrective action based on the results of L2 switch status checks When an error is detected on an L2 switch or an event log is output The infrastructure administrator must confirm if the specifications of configuration scripts or parameter files used in auto configuration are correct When it is possible that the hardware has failed in cases where the L2 switch device status is unknown or the link status is down that is not intended by infrastructure administrator The infrastructure administrator must request confirmation of the status of the L2 switch from the network device administrator The n
9. A server designed to be mounted in a rack RAID Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive Disks Technology that realizes high speed and highly reliable storage systems using multiple hard disks RAID management tool Software that monitors disk arrays mounted on PRIMERGY servers The RAID management tool differs depending on the model or the OS of PRIMERGY servers RDM Raw Device Mapping A function of VMware This function provides direct access from a VMware virtual machine to a LUN RDN Relative Distinguished Name A name used to identify the lower entities of a higher entry Each RDN must be unique within the same entry Remote Management Controller A unit used for managing servers Used for gathering server data failure notification power control etc For Fujitsu PRIMERGY servers iRMC2 For SPARC Enterprise ILOM T series servers XSCF M series servers For HP servers iLO2 integrated Lights Out For Dell IBM servers BMC Baseboard Management Controller Remote Server Management A PRIMEQUEST feature for managing partitions Reserved SB Indicates the new system board that will be embedded to replace a failed system board if the hardware of a system board embedded in a partition fails and it is necessary to disconnect the failed system board 198 resource General term referring to the logical definition of the hardware such as servers storage and network devices and software that comprise a
10. For details on how to release servers from maintenance mode refer to Appendix C Maintenance Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE Execute the rexadm server command from the command line For details on the rexadm server command refer to 3 11 rcxadm server in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Restoration This section explains restoration Use the following procedure for restoration 1 If a management blade has failed replace it with new one If an admin LAN or switches fail replace them After that initialize the management blade To initialize the management blade select controlled by VIOM in the management window of the management blade After performing the configuration to forcibly reset the local VIOM settings on the displayed screen restart the management board In either case if any concerns arise contact Fujitsu technical staff 2 Mount a blade on the chassis 3 After unregistering the restored chassis using the ROR console register the chassis again 4 After powering on the server in the restored chassis from the server resource tree forcibly power off the server After restoring the blade chassis use the following procedure to relocate the L Server 1 Stop an L Server For details on how to stop an L Server refer to 17 1 2 Stopping an L Server in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE 2 Perform modification of
11. If the content of the configuration file is up to date this step is not required If the content is not up to date back up the configuration file using the rexadm netdevice cfbackup command The date and time of backup can be checked using the rcxadm netdevice cflist command When the management function for network device configuration files is not used Back up the configuration files from network devices For information about the backup method refer to the network device manuals Change the target network device in standby status to maintenance mode A hardware maintenance person performs the regular maintenance operations for network devices batch application or firmware update Back up the current network device configuration files from the network devices with operational status When the management function for network device configuration files is used If the content of the configuration file is up to date this step is not required If the content is not up to date back up the configuration file using the rexadm netdevice cfbackup command The date and time of backup can be checked using the rcxadm netdevice cflist command When the management function for network device configuration files is not used Back up the configuration files from network devices For information about the backup method refer to the network device manuals Check that there are no differences between the network device configuration files ba
12. T 94 Chapter 11 faariterng HesOUIPO 1 Gre He eese eire la RECUERDE ERE EE RERO IESU 2 as esse So Secs sch szcgn E ca ace hans E gcse das Sta eS Se vacated E E EE E E UE ono OIG ac E ES TE E E T E E E A A EE E EAE de dosh syetonesbexsee E 11 3 Addressing Resource Failures 114 Monitorine Ne WER MM LD Docaln cauon or arr LCR vaca es chase iaceo pte e nt et Erb Or rdi en i ED Le E n Ee et e tous ENAS 100 11 4 1 1 When Notified of an Error by a Tenant Administrator or Tenant User eese 100 11 4 1 2 When Changing State is Detected during Status Confirmation Using the ROR Console eee 101 11 4 2 Firewall Status COHDIEIPIUDDL ciere ceteri erede edente toro rien keen eoe eina 11 4 2 1 When an L Platform Using a Firewall is Identified 11 4 2 2 When a Firewall Changing State is Detected during Status Confirmation Using the ROR Console 103 13 453 Server Load Balancer Status CobfiERIION siisii iesistie en rri tnr rtt crepat rere Ferret bae deines EO Pe Ees ESE 104 11 4 3 1 When an L Platform Using a Server Load Balancer is Identified esee 104 11 4 3 2 When a Changing State of Server Load Balancer is Detected during Status Confirmation Using the ROR Console 105 T144 L2 Switch Status Conia assisteren tosis iene dictt rt p e pedet reper ep VPE ERU WE Alei EH PERS xs 106 11 455 Status Confirmation
13. The operation image of accounting is shown below ROR Console Register accounting estimated for the tenant administrator ormation C EPiosuct master pnce Subsoribeto an L Platform po ce managernent e Subscriber moni Q Window Q Mateingke Usage charge h The infrastructure administrator pe mourt window Mew usage charges the tenant used Ss zimia ROR Console for the iefrastructure Usage charges Create A administrator Ho L Platform Template based on emplate management usage amourt Publish window e L Platform Template Create tenant y Tenant management x e ch 9 om me e Daces Subscription gt Usage charge manager Usage charges for each tenart and resounes used ladite Usage charge ine i Mew usage charges window Subsoriber Atenant user orthe tenant administrator who subscribes to an L Platform Accounts manager A user responsible for sending the invoice to the tenant cut off date for usage charges C send Email 113 Management and operation of accounting information by the infrastructure administrator 1 The infrastructure administrator registers L Platform template information using the L Platform management window of the ROR Console 2 The infrastructure administrator registers the accounting information using the product master maintenance command Refer to 15 3 Operate Accounting Information for information
14. User group name on When the logged in user does not belong to a user group a hyphen is output IP address The IP addresses of the connected clients are output Starting and stopping of operations and errors are output The following statuses Progress Status are output Start of operations 135 Starting Operation identifier End of operations Completed Operation identifier Errors during operations Error Operation identifier A resource name and a resource identifier are output in the following format Resource Resource name Resource identifier Resource name The parameters received by the manager are output Event Operations For the information that will be output refer to 16 1 4 Scope of Operations Recorded in Operation Logs amp Note A hyphen may be output for an operation identifier Foroperations involving multiple resources the same resource name as the one displayed in the Recent Operations on the ROR console and the event log is output in Resource p Example Output the latest 1 day s worth of data For details on how to operate operation logs refer to 5 13 rcxadm logctl and for the information to be output refer to 16 1 4 Scope of Operations Recorded in Operation Logs in the Reference Guide Command XML CE rcxadm logctl list latest duration 1D RETURN Date User Group IP Progress Resource Event 2011 03 10 21 15 00 390
15. pao Src hour L1 1 480 718 Usas charge per 1CPU 2 70 Usage charge for CPU wes t oom O GBhow Cog 4xe 2572 gon otGenow 10Ge wo snes Monthly usage charge for L Server IE Point 0606060600092000600000099090000090909909090000090900999090000009090990900000090909090000000900909090000000999000000009909090000099299 Fractions in usage charges When the calculations of usage charge produce a figure that includes fractions less than the lowest unit in the currency the remainder is rounded off L Platform transfers When an L Platform is moved the usage charges for resources charged by amount are divided between the departure tenant and destination tenant according to the amounts used When resources are charged by a fixed amount the departure tenant is billed 15 4 6 Sending Usage charges The usage charges for the previous month confirmed the day after the cut off date are attached as a usage charge file and sent to the email address The usage charge file is a zip file combining the usage charge list file and the usage charge detail file The detail of this file is as follows 131 Usage charges file YYYYMM renant name date deleted zip File of usage charges for the tenant in zip format YYYYMM is the date of the cut off date deleted is added when the tenant has already been deleted Usage charge list file YYYYMM tenant name date deleted csv File in CSV format showing the t
16. which holds the current configuration details and startup config which holds the configuration that is valid directly after startup In Resource Orchestrator these two types of files are the target of backup and restore operations network device environment file A collective term that refers to the files necessary for operating devices such as CA certificates user authentication databases customized user information etc but excluding the network device configuration file As these files are not usually changed after they have been configured Resource Orchestrator does not back them up each time automatic configuration is performed network device file Regarding the network device file management function this is a collective term that refers to the files held by network devices that are the target of backup and restore operations The two types of network device files are network device configuration files and network device environment files network map A GUI function for graphically displaying the connection relationships of the servers and LAN switches that compose a network network view A window that displays the connection relationships and status of the wiring of a network map NFS Network File System A system that enables the sharing of files over a network in Linux environments NIC Network Interface Card An interface used to connect a server to a network non global zone A virtual machine envir
17. 123 125 2 2 Delete Socountinp Dioniallot aae ce tee etie ttm Aide rep edle nee x e o E Rie eri mass R dede o ps 125 15 34 Relerence Aocoubtitg InfOrtiallelr ueri sedo riter eisrean eren t er tet E ere et ein EE EEEE Ceci aget SET EEES E gl 126 jet e cua gitur 7 C E E E EE EE H 126 1221 Overview ot Usate ch ree Cale manne os oa peii ett rm etre ibs Pr Retenir etie ote eod re rn derbi ios 127 15 4 2 Resource Usage Times 15 4 3 How to Charge for Resources LSA Resource Usage truant and TIME aure Tenet eerte eere E Mee PER EH SE ERE nean 128 15315 Example of Usage charge Calsulafioiti eere treten beret neret exe e e reet re Or de erit vandaag gestonsentbeasiosiartes 128 ENS e un aer oor 131 15 4 6 1 Hasage Charge List Elle 5 eec diei rede re d ae E ceiasstancdesecasen 132 1544 0 2 Usage chatgs Deta Pile tte be eher dn i d d ge E de dpt EE E noo deett epp 133 Xi Chaprer 6 Mri Ng Us coe a Rut tein t P efe e rd REOR DRE ER BUR RE RSEN EE 135 EE IURI Pe 135 BGs BD Opt a e E N 135 CREAD T 2 EET 138 15 1 5 Retention eee retire mere ts 139 16 14 Scope or Operations Recorded in Operation LOgs c teretes ertet petere sede enisi obese Le been 140 j 4 ups e a 140 16 2 1 Contisurauno Nanagement Audit Log urat oem dite tete eer EP HE te E
18. 3 4 5 6 Change the target network device to the maintenance mode Replace the network devices Hardware maintenance person Restore configuration of replaced network device along by maintenance procedure of network device Release the maintenance mode of network devices when problems with network devices after replacement have been solved Notification that maintenance operations are complete When the Management Function for Network Device Configuration Files is Used 1 2 3 4 Announcement of planned maintenance operations Change the target network device to the maintenance mode Replace the network devices Hardware maintenance person Restore configuration of replaced network device using network device file which was backed up beforehand along by maintaining procedure of the network device When operating restoration to log in to replaced network device directly 1 Export network device file which was backed up beforehand with rcxadm netdevice cfexport command 2 Restore exported network device file along by maintenance procedure of the network device When operating restoration to use the restoration function of the management function for network device file 1 Configure replaced network device definition that are needed in operation management 2 Restore network device file A Information When replaced network device is Cisco ASA 5500 series operating restoration by rexadm netdevic
19. Design Guide CE 00060600090990990900009099909090000900990990000009090099090909090000909909909900000999099090000009909909909909900009999090900000999909909900009999 Activating a Maintenance LED Use the following procedure to activate a server blade s maintenance LED 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select LED ON from the popup menu The Turning on Maintenance LED dialog is displayed 2 Click OK Selecting the Automatically turn off checkbox will automatically shut down the server after activating its maintenance LED G amp G Note Once the maintenance LED of a server blade is activated new errors detected in that server cannot be checked from its LED anymore Check the server status directly from the ROR console 006060000000902909090990990990000009090909909009090000000090090909002000009000009009090999090909029090000000909909090092000000000909099299 Deactivating a Maintenance LED Use the following procedure to deactivate a server blade s maintenance LED 1 In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select LED OFF from the popup menu The Turning off Maintenance LED dialog is displayed etd 2 Click OK The maintenance LED is turned off 9 2 2 Reconfiguration of Hardware Properties This section explains how to re configure hardware properties for replaced hardware After hardware replacement it is necessary to re con
20. Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for Intel64 SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 11 for x86 SUSE R Linux Enterprise Server 11 for EM64T Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for x86 Red Hat Enterprise Linux Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for x86 Windows Server 2003 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for x86 Red Hat R Ente
21. Example value 100MB to change the size of the audit log file to 100 MB 2 Restart the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to Restart the manager Procedure for changing the number of generations to be saved Use the following procedure to change the number of audit log generations to be saved 1 Rewrite the settings file The location to change is shown below Windows Manager Settings file Location to change one location vsys_audit_log Installation foldeNRCX CFMGconfig Change the underlined part of the param Wsys log4j xml name MaxBackupIndex value 9 gt element under the lt appender name auditfileout class org apache log4j Rolling FileAppender gt element to the desired value Example value 100 to change the number of audit log generations to 100 Linux Manager Settings file Location to change one location vsys audit log letc opt FJS Vcfmg config vsys log4j xml Change the underlined part of the param name MaxBackupIndex value 9 gt element under the lt appender name auditfileout class org apache log4j Rollin gFileAppender gt element to the desired value Example value 100 to change the number of audit log generations to 100 2 Restart the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to Restart the manager 16 2 2 Audit Logs of Output by the Tenant Management Accounting Access Contro
22. Note 1 TenantDeletedDate This is the date and time the tenant was deleted Output only if the tenant has already been deleted Empty string is output if this has not been deleted Format YY Y Y MM DD HH mm ss SSS 1 Example 2013 03 31 23 59 59 999 LplatformId This is the L Platform ID 1 LplatformName This is the L Platform name 1 LplatformDeletedDate Date that the L Platform was returned Output only if the L Platform has already been returned Empty string is output if this has not been returned Format Y Y Y Y MM DD HH mm ss SSS 1 Example 2013 03 31 23 59 59 999 Date This is the cut off date Format Y Y Y Y MM 1 Example 2013 03 ChargeAmount The amount of usage charges for each L Platform The amounts are values so they are not enclosed with double quotes Format ZZZZZZZZZZ29 1 Example 1000 FileVersion This is the version of the file Fixed as 1 0 ItemColumn1 This is a breakdown item 1 The template name virtual L Server name or physical L Server name is output 133 ItemColumn2 This is a breakdown item 2 The category of the resource Empty string is output if this is for an L Platform template virtual L Server or physical L Server ItemColumn3 This is a breakdown item 3 The image name or resource identifier is output 1 ItemColumn4 This is a breakdown item 4 This is the unit corresponding to the unit price A hyphen is output if this is for an L Platform temp
23. Resource Coordinator Web Server Apache Resource Orchestrator Sub Web Server Mongrel Resource Orchestrator Sub Web Server Mongrel2 Resource Coordinator DB Server PostgreSQL Linux Manager Manager Services rcvmr Manager services also include the following daemons rcxmanager rcxtaskmgr rcxmongrell rcxmongrel2 rcxhttpd 2 2 Starting and Stopping an Agent The Resource Orchestrator agent starts automatically on managed servers This section explains how to manually start or stop an agent and how to check its power state amp Note To prevent conflicts related services are uninstalled from the Resource Orchestrator agent when using ServerView Deployment Manager on the admin LAN In such cases there is no need to start or stop those services when starting or stopping the Resource Orchestrator agent Windows Hyper V The agent consists of the following two Windows services Agent Service Resource Coordinator Agent Related Services Deployment Agent Systemwalker SQC DCM From the Windows Control Panel open Administrative Tools Then open the Services window to check the state of each service The following explains how to start and stop each service Agent Service Agents can be started and stopped using the start and stop subcommands of the rexadm agtctl command For details of the command refer to 5 3 rcxadm agtctl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Related Services From the Win
24. Restoring the Admin Server Database restoration restores by applying to the base backup the contents of updates to the database in WAL files that have been output after the base backup was taken The rcxmgrrestore command is used for restoration Refer to Section 10 1 4 Restoring the Admin Server for details 10 1 1 Mechanism of Backup and Restoration This section describes the mechanism of backup and restoration including environment requirements points to note and the restart position after restoration in a system in which this product is installed Backup and Restoration Environment Requirements The following conditions must be satisfied in the environments to be backed up and restored The operating systems match Note that this does not include operating system version differences The host information host name or IP address matches The character code systems match The directory services match The product installation folders match Points to Note at Backup and Restoration This section describes the points to note when backup and restoration is being performed Administrator privileges are required in order to execute the commands If and only if resources backed up using online backup are to be restored execute the command that disables a service application for which an application process no longer exists recoverAllService command Perform backup and restore operations as described below fo
25. The status of resources can also be monitored from both the resource tree and the Resource List tab When an error occurs a status icon is added to the icon of the resource concerned Double clicking on a resource icon displays the Resource Details tab which provides detailed information about the corresponding resource Icons Displayed in the ROR Console The following table shows the resource icons used in BladeViewer and their associated meanings 96 Table 11 3 Resource Icons m o L2 switch Note Power monitoring devices PDU or UPS are not subject to monitoring The following table shows the status icons used in Resource Orchestrator and their associated meanings It also shows which status icons require corrective actions Table 11 4 Status Icons Corrective Icon Status Meaning Action No action is Sore froma qe IMEEM necessary Warning Action must be warning i An error has occurred but the resource can still be used 1 taken Unknown Action must be unknown The status of the resource cannot be obtained 2 3 taken Error Action must be An error whose cause is unknown has occurred and the resource tak aken cannot be used No action is necessary When a LAN switch is in warning status it may mean that the LAN switch has been replaced with another model To use the LAN switch as it is first delete the registered LAN switch and then register it again 2 W
26. before changing it If there are pending processes finish all of them by cancelling approving rejecting accepting or dismissing each of them Refer to 19 2 Application Process Settings in the Setup Guide CE for information on how to change the application process to be used 8 5 6 Editing the Environment Setup File for the L Platform API Refer to 19 7 Editing the Environment Setup File for the L Platform API in the Setup Guide CE for information on how to change the environment settings for the L Platform API 8 5 7 Edit the License Agreement Refer to 19 12 Edit the License Agreement in the Setup Guide CE for information on how to edit the license displayed in the L Platform Management window 8 5 8 Settings when RHEL5 Xen is used Refer to 19 8 Settings when RHELS5 Xen is used in the Setup Guide CE for information on the settings for when RHELS Xen is to be used 8 5 9 Default Password Setting for Sent Emails Refer to 19 1 Settings for Sending Email in the Setup Guide CE for information on how to set whether to include the deployed server s default password in the emails sent when an L Platform is deployed or a server is added to an L Platform 29 8 5 10 Settings for the Maximum Number of Connections for the L Platform Template The maximum number of L Servers that can be placed in an L Platform Template and the maximum number of NICs in a segment of an L Platform Template can be modified 1 Use the ed
27. in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE For details on the rexadm netdevice command refer to 3 8 rexadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Regular maintenance may not be able to be performed using the described procedure depending on the maintenance details for individual network devices Before performing regular maintenance operations ensure you check the information provided from the network device vendors regarding the maintenance operations of network devices Confirm the following items using the manuals of network devices in advance The operations for network devices status check switchover and backup methods Environmental differences which become problems due to redundancy configurations When performing regular maintenance for multiple network devices of redundancy configurations simultaneously perform replacement operations in units of the same redundancy configurations 9 5 3 Procedure for Addition of Network Devices This section explains the operation for adding network devices 9 5 3 1 Adding L2 Switches to Handle Insufficient Numbers of Ports when Adding Servers This section explains the procedure for addition assuming a case where it is necessary to add L2 switches since the LAN ports of the L2 switch to connect to are insufficient when adding servers The explanation is mainly about operations related to L2 switches When there is no desc
28. it is necessary to deploy by specifying an L Server template that has redundancy settings enabled Refer to Chapter 15 L Server Template Operations in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE for information on how to create L Server templates If the settings are changed after deployment change the Type of Server specifications by reconfiguring the L Platform Register different L Server templates where redundancy settings are enabled and disabled Also use L Server template names that make it easy to distinguish whether redundancy settings are enabled or disabled My Example L Server template name where redundancy settings are disabled VMware Small L Server template name where redundancy settings are enabled VMware Small HA 7 2 9 Automatic Server Release Settings When deploying a server with automatic server release settings to an L Platform it is necessary to deploy by specifying an L Server template that has automatic server release settings enabled Refer to Chapter 15 L Server Template Operations in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE for information on how to create L Server templates If the settings are changed after deployment change the Type of Server specifications by reconfiguring the L Platform Register different L Server templates where automatic server release settings are enabled and disabled Also use L Server template names t
29. modify the charge information after the system has stopped If system operation is not stopped the pre modification amounts may be displayed for the estimated charges and usage charges The displayed price does not change for the subscription from saved specifications if the specifications are saved before modifying the price Notify the tenant of the cautions that the price will not be the price displayed on the L Platform management window but be the modified price after the modification date 15 3 3 Delete Accounting Information Delete the accounting information if the accounting calculation becomes unnecessary for the L Platform templates or the L Server imported into the system The accounting information becomes unnecessary if the following conditions are met The L Platform templates are disabled The log that shows the usage result of the corresponding L Platform templates or L Server imported into the system does not exist in the metering log Follow the procedure below from disabling the L Platform templates to deleting the accounting information Begin from Check Metering Log for L Servers imported into the system WS See Refer to Appendix B Metering Log for information on the metering log 06606062020092000000090099000000090990909000009090909909090000009099000000009090909000000000900000009009990000000909090000099299 Disable L Platform templates 1 Notify to the tenant about the contents of the L Platform temp
30. refer to Chapter 18 Linking L Servers with Configured Physical Servers or Virtual Machines in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE 14 Chapter 7 Management of L Platform This chapter explains how to management of L Platform 7 1 Review for L Platform Usage Applications Use the Request tab of the ROR console to review applications to use from tenant users for operations such as usage application configuration modification and cancel of L Platforms For details on the Request tab refer to Chapter 10 Request in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE 7 2 Administration of L Platform This section explains how to perform L Platform operations 7 2 1 Deleting Unnecessary Data If an L Platform or server deployed by this product was accidently deleted by virtualization software such as VMware it is possible to delete unneeded information about the system or server remaining in this product What is actually done is that the unneeded L Platform information or server information status is changed to Finished with return with the cfmg deletesysdata Unnecessary Data Deletion command so that it is no longer displayed in the L Platform management View Refer to 12 3 cfmg deletesysdata Unnecessary Data Deletion in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for details on this command 7 2 2 Updating the Cloning Image In this product the resource ID is used when managing
31. vsys trace log vsys batch log Installation foldeNRCXCFMGWogs cfmg api log Installation foldeNRCXCTMGMWMyPortalNog myportal trace log 155 Linux Manager Output destination directory Output destination file var opt FJS Vcfmg logs vsys trace log vsys batch log cfmg api log var opt FJS Vctmyp log myportal trace log Output format Output format date time log level message ID message text log level One of the following info Information level message warn Warning level message error Error level message fatal Fatal level message message ID Prefix and message number The prefix for myportal trace log is MGRV The prefix for cfmg api log is PAPI The prefix for all other logs is VSYS message text Message content Note Refer to the Messages for information on the message ID and message text Procedure for changing the investigation output destination Use the following procedure to change the output destination for investigation logs 1 Rewrite the settings files corresponding to each log The following table shows the settings file and the location to change Windows Manager Settings file Location to change one location vsys trace log Installation foldeNRCXCFMQGconfig param name File value C ProgramData Wsys log4j xml Fujitsu SystemwalkerCF MG logs vsys_trace_log gt vsys_batch_log Installation_folde RCXCFMG config lt par
32. 000 0900 vsysId001 orgId001 PERIOD vserver RUNNING userId001 serverlId001 syvstemName001 serverName002 imageInfoName001 StoragePool002 100 VMPoo1001 2 30 60 10 50 serverType001 2 0 2011 08 08T10 20 10 000 0900 vsysId001 orgId001 PERIOD vdisk userId001 server Id001 diskId001 systemName001 diskName001 StoragePool002 200 perenne 2 0 2011 08 08T10 20 10 00040900 vsysId001 orgId001 PERIOD vsys userld001 systemName001 i i i baseTemplateId001 ooopprpTHHTT XML format files The format of XML format files is as follows lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 lt meterlog gt lt entry gt lt Item ID gt Value lt Item ID gt lt entry gt lt entry gt lt Item ID gt Value lt Item ID gt lt entry gt lt meterlog gt The first row of the CSV format corresponds to the lt entry gt element The first column of the CSV format corresponds to the lt Item ID gt element If an item is not output the lt Item ID tag itself is not output An output example of an XML format file is shown below lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt meterlog gt lt entry gt lt version gt 2 0 lt version gt lt event_time gt 2011 07 02T00 00 00 000 0900 lt event_time gt vsys id vsysId001 vsys id org id orgId001 org id lt event gt ADD lt ev
33. 2 Use the acec change command to change the REC transfer mode to Through mode 3 Suspend the REC session using the acec cancel command In this case do not specify the force option When Performing Switchover from Standby to Operating Failback The procedure for switchover is the same as that for when a LUN is created in the storage unit beforehand 17 2 High Availability for Admin Servers This section explains high availability of managers 169 Prerequisites for Manager Cluster Operation For details on prerequisites for operating managers in cluster environments refer to 7 3 Admin Server High Availability Design in the Design Guide CE Manager Cluster Operation in Windows Guest Environments in Hyper V environments Install an operating system and configure a domain controller on the domain controller server Perform installation and configuration of the admin server The following operations are necessary Primary Node Connection with shared storage Configure BIOS Install Hyper V roles Install and configure EMC Solutions Enabler when used Add a failover clustering function Create a Hyper V virtual network Create clusters Prepare virtual machines Register virtual machines in clusters Install and configure storage management software Install and configure VM management software Install and configure ServerView Operations Manager and ServerView Virtual IO Manager Install the Resource
34. 2 86 Edit dows 200S x80 Editon Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Enterprise x86 ce Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Standard x64 Wind 2 4 Edit indows 2008 x6 nis Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Enterprise x64 Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Standard Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition Windows 2003 x64 Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition Windows R 7 Professional Wind 7 Windows R y Ultimate Windows Vista R Business Windows Vista Windows Vista R Enterprise Windows Vista R Ultimate Windows XP Microsoft R Windows R XP Professional operating system Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for Intel64 linus Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for x86 Red Hat R
35. Apply Approve 2012 04 11 17 04 15 908 tenant admin001 COMPLETED 0O0 Approve Assess 2012 04 11 17 04 21 346 infra admin001 COMPLETED 0 Accept Accepted Point Using an operating system feature such as Task Scheduler Windows Manager or cron Linux Manager configure the settings so that the get process instance audit information command is executed at fixed intervals so that an audit log of process instances can be obtained between command executions 60606060620000900000009009000000909090990909000009090909990900000009990000000909090900000009009290900000099909000009990900000609999 16 3 Operation Logs Activity This section explains operation logs Operation logs are used as maintenance information when investigating and dealing with errors 16 3 1 Operation Logs for Accounting The following table shows the files where operation logs used for maintenance information accounting are output Copy the files described below to collect maintenance information 154 Windows Manager Operation Installation_folde RCXCTMG Charging log accounting_calc_mail log 1 The results of sending log the usage charge file are output 2 This log file is 5 MB in size and holds 5 generations 2 Refer to Chapter 9 Messages Starting with ctact in the Messages for information on the execution result that is output Linux Manager Operation var opt FJS Vctchg log accounting calc mail log 1 The
36. Design Guide CE Shut down the server after completing BIOS settings 3 Re configure Hardware Properties after Replacement After replacing the server re configure Resource Orchestrator with the latest hardware properties For details on how to re configure hardware properties refer to 9 3 1 Reconfiguration of Hardware Properties After hardware properties have been re configured the maintenance LED is automatically turned off in the ROR console 4 Perform Post server Switchover Operations For details on the operations that must be performed after server switchover refer to 4 3 Post Switchover Operations in the Operation Guide VE 49 Replacing a Server with no Spare Server Assigned Use the following procedure to smoothly replace a server and resume its applications 1 7 Place the Server into Maintenance Mode Place the primary server to replace into maintenance mode For details on maintenance mode refer to Appendix C Maintenance Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE Create a System Image Backup For local boot servers create a system image backup when possible For details on backing up system images refer to Chapter 16 Backup and Restore in the User s Guide VE In SAN boot environments the boot disk can be restored without having to back up and restore a system image Activate the Maintenance LED Activate the maintenance LED on the server that is
37. Dual Role Monitor For information about the documents for Resource Orchestrator refer to Chapter 1 Documentation Road Map in the Quick Start Guide CE Purpose This manual explains how to operate ServerView Resource Orchestrator hereinafter Resource Orchestrator Target Readers This manual is written for system administrators who will use Resource Orchestrator to operate the infrastructure in private cloud or data center environments When setting up systems it is assumed that readers have the basic knowledge required to configure the servers storage network devices and server virtualization software to be installed Additionally a basic understanding of directory services such as Active Directory and LDAP is necessary Organization This manual is composed as follows Section 1 Overview Chapter 1 Overview of Operations Maintenance and Monitoring Provides an overview of the operation maintenance and monitoring of Resource Orchestrator Section 2 Operation Chapter 2 Starting and Stopping Managers and Agents Explains the methods for deliberately starting and stopping managers and agents Chapter 3 Managing User Accounts Explains the management of user accounts Chapter 4 Managing Tenants Explains the management of tenants Chapter 5 Managing Templates Explains the management of templates Chapter 6 Managing Resources and Resource Pools Explains the management of resources and resource pools Chapter 7 Management
38. Environment Setup Pile for the L Plattorm API eren erre retro ce ct ter i eer LEER 29 1 2 7 Bdit he Liceo gel cioe cede eem et Re er EEEE EO ES det ein ek nne e ie ue be ecb detinere o ie E Ee eb S 29 B3 Cte MENT RAE LI A de USEd 0o dere tm dane dt opea eir tender eee dH toga stt 29 95 5 9 Default Password setting for Sent Errails 2 2 icio re tre suns e RTT D na ASSESSEER SO ineas ai 29 8 5 10 Settings for the Maximum Number of Connections for the L Platform Template esee 30 55 11 Cuscomizme the User Rights for L Platform Operations iecore tnter rtr sosisini anis ienesis sinite 30 8 6 Settings for Tenant Management and Account Management ien iiie iter cei eer tete soa teer Ebo br te E EHE Ee eb Eda etate ERR ern 30 8 6 1 Settings for Tenant Management and Account Manapemettt iedn eee ti rettet tate ane rhe h uiae ho c ee duree aid be breed an kenn aia 31 8 6 2 Editing the User Agreement when Registering a User Mey tonne ns oe R 8 7 1 Display Function Settings for Estimated DOlog u eet e ene a eiecit reor E eer a cdi ed DF C uBney Lari emia MMOS eerte d errem torn ertet eiit rere E Ne o Ee e dese h EP EXPE et tub a te Hd eO n e eet deed DARENT ICA Lii NR E A E ETE EAN EEE E E E E E 2 14 Usage Cbaree Calculator SOWIE oent eee eee ttr e reo n et ip ei sees E EAS RELEE 8 8 System Conditiba Server List Seg S erisir iesiri rean Ee ene c er ate leider etri e ete
39. GHz performance cpu reserve Yes Yes No No No Yes Reserve value 0 to 999999 Unit 0 1 GHz of CPU Maximum 99999 9 GHz performance memory size Yes Yes No No No Yes Memory to 999999 Unit 0 1 GB capacity Maximum 99999 9 GB memory reserve Reserve value 0 to 999999 Unit 0 1 GB of memory Maximum 99999 9 GB capacity storage pool p pool Variable length string name unlimited disk size Yes Yes No No EIE disk to 999999 Unit 0 1 GB size Maximum 99999 9 GB server template n Yes Yes No No L Server ASCII 1 to 32 characters template name status No No No No Status RUNNING Active STOPPED Stopped Yes Output No Not output Physical L Server In addition to the common items output the following items will be output 181 Item ID Outputforeachevent for each event Item name Description CHAN iore START STOP jo GE NE id Tenant name ASCII 1 to 32 characters Name of the tenant user aai User account ASCII 1 to 32 characters User that owns the L Platform vsys id Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes L Platform ID ASCII 1 to 32 characters ID identifying the L Platform server_id Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes L Server ID ASCII 1 to 64 characters ID identifying the L Server system name Yes Yes No No No Yes L Platform UTF 8 1 to 256 characters name Name of the L Platform comment server name L Server name UTF 8 1 to 256 characters Name of the L Server comment image name name ASCII 1 to 32 characte
40. L2 Switch Access Switch L2 Switch Access Switch L2 Switch Server Server Server Server For Existing Tenants For Newly Added Tenants 1 Design additional configurations Network device administrator 2 Provide the additional network device information to the infrastructure administrator Network device administrator Add a network device in the state where the following operations have been completed nitial configuration Operation test Integration of the device into a physical network configuration 3 Register the resources of the server It is necessary to register chassis or LAN switch blades for a blade server 4 Create network configuration information XML definition using the acquired network device information 69 5 Register the added firewall server load balancer and L2 switch as network devices Use the rcxadm netdevice create command to register as a network device 6 When the following applies to the additional network device create and register rulesets When adding a firewall server load balancer or L2 switch of a model for which sample scripts are not provided or those of a model that has not been used in the system until now In this case it is necessary to create a directory to allocate rulesets to When using a model for which sample scripts are not prepared or even when using a model which has been used in the system until now by configuring definitions using
41. Note To replace LAN switch blades with different models first delete the registered LAN switch blade and then register the replacement LAN switch blade After the LAN switch blade is registered the VLAN settings must be configured for the internal and external ports For details on the VLAN settings refer to 5 4 4 Configuring VLANs on LAN Switch Blades in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE When changing from IBP to another mode or vice versa when using a PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 series LAN switch blade delete the registered LAN switch blade and register it again 060600020009000000909090909000090909000000000959099090900000090909900000009090090000000900909909090000009009090000000920900000000299 Replacing Fibre Channel Switch Blades No specific action is required in Resource Orchestrator In Resource Orchestrator the settings for Fibre Channel switch blades are not restored Restore the settings for Fibre Channel switch blades based on the information in hardware manuals 51 Replacing Storage Blades No specific action is required in Resource Orchestrator when replacing a storage blade that does not contain the boot disk of a server blade Use the following procedure to replace a storage blade that contains the boot disk of a server blade 1 Replace the storage blade 2 Insert the server blade s boot disk in the new storage blade 3 If the boot disk s content was backed up re
42. PC server ServerView Deployment Manager Software used to collect and deploy server resources over a network ServerView Operations Manager Software that monitors a server s PRIMERGY hardware state and notifies of errors by way of the network ServerView Operations Manager was previously known as ServerView Console ServerView RAID One of the RAID management tools for PRIMERGY ServerView Update Manager This is software that performs jobs such as remote updates of BIOS firmware drivers and hardware monitoring software on servers being managed by ServerView Operations Manager ServerView Update Manager Express Insert the ServerView Suite DVD1 or ServerView Suite Update DVD into the server requiring updating and start it This is software that performs batch updates of BIOS firmware drivers and hardware monitoring software Single Sign On A system among external software which can be used without login operations after authentication is executed once slave slot A slot that is not recognized as a server when a server that occupies multiple slots is mounted 200 SMB Server Message Block A protocol that enables the sharing of files and printers over a network SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol A communications protocol to manage monitor and control the equipment that is attached to a network software initiator An initiator processed by software using OS functions Solaris container reso
43. Software for managing multiple VM hosts and the VM guests that operate on them Provides value adding functions such as movement between the servers of VM guests migration VMware Virtualization software from VMware Inc Provides a virtualized infrastructure on PC servers enabling flexible management of operations VMware DPM VMware Distributed Power Management A function of VMware This function is used to reduce power consumption by automating power management of servers in VMware DRS clusters VMware DRS VMware Distributed Resource Scheduler A function of VMware This function is used to monitor the load conditions on an entire virtual environment and optimize the load dynamically VMware Teaming A function of VMware By using VMware Teaming it is possible to perform redundancy by connecting a single virtual switch to multiple physical network adapters Web browser A software application that is used to view Web pages WWN World Wide Name A 64 bit address allocated to an HBA Refers to a WWNN or a WWPN WWNN World Wide Node Name A name that is set as a common value for the Fibre Channel ports of a node However the definitions of nodes vary between manufacturers and may also indicate devices or adapters Also referred to as a node WWN WWPN World Wide Port Name A name that is a unique value and is set for each Fibre Channel port HBA CA fibre channel switch ports etc and is the IEEE global MAC address As the F
44. Sp E walbackup Charging f command to use to archive a logfile segment 90 Point Use as a delimiter 0606006000000090009909090990900000090090990909909909090000000090909090059909099000000000900990990990909090090000000999099909006000099 5 Modify the operational settings file for the online backup Open the following file Windows Manager Installation_folder RCXCTMG bin conf ctmgbackup properties Change as follows Setting before Change BASE BACKUP DIR C Fujitsu ROR RCXCTMG backup data WAL ARCHIVE DIR C Fujitsu ROR RCXCTMG backup wal Setting after Change BASE BACKUP DIR D basebackup WAL ARCHIVE DIR E walbackup Point Use as a delimiter Linux Manager opt FJSVctmg bin conf ctmgbackup properties Change as follows Setting before Change BASE BACKUP DIR var opt FJSVctchg backup data WAIL ARCHIVE DIR var opt FJSVctchg backup wal Setting after Change BASE BACKUP DIR basebackup WAL ARCHIVE DIR walbackup Point Use as a delimiter Start the manager Start the manager For details on how to start the manager refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager 10 2 Backup and Restoration of Network Devices This section describes how to operate the backup and restoration of the Network devices 91 10 2 1 Mechanism of Backup and Restoration By backing up network device configuration files restoration of network device conf
45. account is operation to be performed using the account management and specify off if it is not to be performed The initial value is on If off has been specified the Change user account button will not be displayed in the Account window of the account management leftMenu changePassword user visible Specify on if changing user password is to be performed using the account management and specify off if it is not to be performed The initial value is on If off has been specified the Change user password button will not be displayed in the Account window of the account management pote this can be set by Setup Wizard on the ROR Console A setting example is shown below If the line in red font below is missing please add it omitted allowUpdate on setPassword tenantadmin mailwithpasswd off omitted leftMenu modifyUser admin visible on leftMenu changePassword admin visible on leftMenu modifyUser user visible on leftMenu changePassword user visible on visible tenantuser on provisional acount on 3 Open the following directory service operation definition file Windows Manager Installation folderNRORNSVRORMManagerNetcNcustomize dataMldap attr rcxprop Linux Manager etc opt FJSVrcovmr customize data ldap attr rcxprop 4 The following information must be modified Setting item directory service Setting for infrastructure Specify true if user registration to administrat
46. actually used when allocating storage resources tower server A standalone server with a vertical chassis TPP Thin Provisioning Pool One of resources defined using ETERNUS Thin Provisioning Pools are the resource pools of physical disks created using Thin Provisioning TPV Thin Provisioning Volume One of resources defined using ETERNUS Thin Provisioning Volumes are physical disks created using the Thin Provisioning function UNC Universal Naming Convention Notational system for Windows networks Microsoft networks that enables specification of shared resources folders files shared printers shared directories etc b Example hostname dir_name 00060606000000000920909090000000090909999090000000009090909009090909909000000009090909999099000000000090999909009090000000090999299 UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply A device containing rechargeable batteries that temporarily provides power to computers and peripheral devices in the event of power failures Resource Orchestrator uses UPSs with current value display functions as power monitoring devices 202 URL Uniform Resource Locator The notational method used for indicating the location of information on the Internet VIOM ServerView Virtual IO Manager The name of both the I O virtualization technology used to change the MAC addresses of NICs and the software that performs the virtualization Changes to values of WWNs and MAC addresses can be performe
47. by rcxadm netconfig command in advance WS See 606060606200020920000000009090909000090909099090900000090990990900000090990900900009090909090909000000090990900000099900000090990909200000909299 For details on the rexadm netdevice command refer to 3 8 rcxadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on the rcxadm netconfig command refer to 3 7 rcxadm netconfig in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on the unm mon rcxprop file refer to 9 4 8 3 Network Device Management Function Definition File in the Design Guide CE 00606060600000600600606000099000090009090909000009009900090000909090990990900000090909909000000920990990006060009929090006000900006000 0969299 10 2 3 Restoration of Network Devices Restoration is performed in the following cases When executing rcxadm netdevice cfrestore This section describes restoration procedure of backed up network device file When backed up network device file is network device configuration file or network device environment file Restore backed up network device file in rexadm netdevice cfrestore When backed up network device file is both network device configuration file and network device environment file 1 Confirm later back up date of file with displaying back up date of the latest network device configuration file and network device environment file in rexadm netdevice cflist 2 Perform restoration by either restoratio
48. command Refer to 10 4 productmaintain Product Master Maintenance in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on the output function of the product master maintenance command 123 2 Modify the price or specify the time period of the output accounting information file An example of the modification of the accounting information file is shown below Specify future date to the modification date a Addthe modified unit price data newly to change the unit price of the product that is already registered on the product master Example Modify the unit price of the product whose product ID is IDOOI to 2 10 from 2012 08 01 Before modification Product Priori Unit Start of applicable date End of applicable date ID ty price moi o s2 00 2012 01 0rT00 0000 000 0500 After modification Product Priori Unit Start of applicable date End of applicable date ID t price Data A IDOO1 lo 2 00 2012 01 01T00 00 00 000 0900 2012 07 31T23 59 59 999 0900 woo 1 2 10 2012 08 01T00 00 00 000 0900 Set as follows for existing data A End of applicable date Modify to the date just before the modification date Set as follows for new data B Priority Higher priority than the existing data A Unit price New unit price Start of applicable date Modification date End of applicable date Omit b Add new data for the specific time period if a limited time price such as campaign price is
49. configuration changes the upper limits of the server s specifications are determined by the maximum number of CPUs maximum CPU frequency and the maximum memory capacity values specified in the L Platform template s image information After deploying an L Platform and if the server s CPUs CPU frequency and memory capacity are to be changed from the VM host make sure you specify values that do not exceed the maximum values specified in the image information of the L Platform template If the values specified for the CPUs CPU frequency and memory capacity exceed the maximum values specified in the image information of the L Platform template those values will be changed back to match the maximum values when the configuration is changed Point Do not change the server s CPUs CPU frequency and memory capacity from the VM host if possible 20 Chapter 8 Changing Settings This chapter explains how to change settings 8 1 Registering and Deleting Application Process Assessors This section explains how to register and delete application process assessors 8 1 1 Registering an Application Process Assessor This section explains how to register an infrastructure administrator or dual role administrator as an application process assessor Add all infrastructure administrator and dual role administrator to the directory service IflowUsers group in order to use application processes Use the LDIF file to register an application process
50. data could be collected will be deemed to be 0 The average power W of each sample is calculated from the energy value Wh of that sample and its corresponding time interval 0606062020090209090000090992099000090909099004000009090909909909000000999099090900009090909000000090909090909900000909090900000000909909909000069092929 12 4 Displaying Power Consumption Data Graphs For details of how to display graphs of power consumption data refer to 13 2 Displaying Power Consumption Data Graphs in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrator Resource Management CE 110 Chapter 13 Monitoring Resource Pools Dashboard This chapter explains how to monitor resource pools Use the Dashboard Pool Conditions tab of the ROR console to monitor the usage status of resource pools allocated to tenants and resource pools of overall systems For details on the Dashboard Pool Conditions tab refer to Chapter 4 Dashboard Pool Conditions in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE 111 Chapter 14 Monitoring L Platforms This chapter explains how to monitor L Platforms The operation status of L Servers can be monitored from the Dashboard System Conditions tab on the ROR console For details on the Dashboard System Conditions tab refer to Chapter 5 Dashboard System Conditions in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE 112 Chapter 15 Accounting This chapter explains
51. e RES E E EC UH TES HIER X EARTH NETUS 140 16 2 2 Audit Logs of Output by the Tenant Management Accounting Access Control and System Condition 146 16 2 3 Application Process Audit Log e 15 3 Operation Logs DAXCUVIBI noe e rer EIE Her Ee EE E EUER ERE p DEEP DEO OL ORO FIERE ERES 155 1 Operation Logs Tor ACCOUN E n eI eene Be Tee bem eie HE ie ERE Ere eee eo Ie E toe repe dide raus 154 por do IER E E 155 1643 1 TInygstipation Logs oti Admin Sesvers eene mne eth E ae seievazscvesatevcosenssicedezsdasessteduseasenavabaneucegsvosabeneugseassaeee 155 Part 5 High Availability and Disaster FUgQOVely ui iie edidere terr eite tede ce Pene euer teca te lined 158 Chapter 17 High Availability of Managed RESOUINCES 2 cccccesceceescesecceeseeeeecesscdenoeesceeedeneceneseceeedaensseeseecetceneeneesete 159 1741 Buh Avslsbilisof Managed Resouebl orent nier rer tret Deb ertet ette be dot beivassdoniaybolninvesce iasteans saseeutanaabivedvea Sevens 159 17 1 1 High Availability of L Servers 17 1 2 Blade Chassis High Availability 13 173 Eligb Pees aay Dor Storage LESEN 2nd erre E t tree ertet ER eerte EEA 164 Fe Push A vansbIBD Tor DR Se soa oe rete ERE att D recte t er d reset co de I ERA unio ois 169 Chapter 19 TS Ate CGO uus niia nnen iei rat puse reste Eaa Lau E Re ER oC EACH REPE HE UR ADT X eL LR SEP UM dU SR PRU RE RT iiie 173 Appendix A Notes on Operating ServerVie
52. edition which provides server registration monitoring and visualization external FTP server An FTP server used to relay network device files between the ROR manager and network devices that do not possess their own FTP server function FC switch Fibre Channel Switch A switch that connects Fibre Channel interfaces and storage devices Fibre Channel A method for connecting computers and peripheral devices and transferring data Generally used with servers requiring high availability to connect computers and storage systems Fibre Channel port The connector for Fibre Channel interfaces When using ETERNUS storage referred to as an FC CA port when using NetApp storage referred to as an FC port when using EMC CLARiiON referred to as an SP port when using EMC Symmetrix DMX or EMC Symmetrix VMAX referred to as a DIRECTOR port fibre channel switch blade A fibre channel switch mounted in the chassis of a blade server FlexVol A function that uses aggregates to provide virtual volumes Volumes can be created in an instant FTRP The pool for physical disks created by Automatic Storage Layering for ETERNUS In Resource Orchestrator FTRPs are used as virtual storage resources on which Thin Provisioning attributes are configured FTV The virtual volumes created by Automatic Storage Layering for ETERNUS In Resource Orchestrator FTVs are used as disk resources on which Thin Provisioning attributes are configured global
53. explains how to replace hardware external to servers Replacing Management Blades No specific action is required in Resource Orchestrator Replacing Management Boards No specific action is required in Resource Orchestrator Replacing LAN Switches No specific action is required in Resource Orchestrator when replacing a LAN switch 9 4 For Servers not Using Server Management Software This section explains how to maintain servers not using server management software When replacing an entire server a CPU or memory if there are differences in the CPU or memory specifications before and after the replacement reflect the new CPU and memory specifications of the replaced server in the definition file before reconfiguring hardware information For Virtual L Servers For details on definition files refer to C 1 4 Configuration when Creating a Virtual L Server Using a Server which cannot Use ServerView Agents in the Setup Guide CE For Physical L Servers For details on definition files refer to B 1 6 Configuration when Creating a Physical L Server without Specifying a Model Name in the L Server Template in the Setup Guide CE In the following cases reflect the correct value on the definition file before reconfiguring the hardware information When defining the configuration information CPU core count CPU clock speed memory capacity etc of the target server after registering it with Resource Orchestrator
54. file Please confirm that itis possible to check configuration of network device from network device environment file by manual of network device in advance For details on how to configure and release the maintenance mode refer to 22 1 Switchover of Maintenance Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE For details on the rexadm netdevice command refer to 3 8 rexadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 606060600600090900000090990990909900000909909909000009009099292090000090909090090909000090909099090000009090900000000909900000090999090000009999 amp Note Replacement using the same model is a prerequisite when replacing network devices Confirm the following items using the manuals of network devices in advance The replacement procedure when using redundancy configurations The operations for network devices status check and switchover Environmental differences which become problems when configuring redundancy configurations When the management function for Network device configuration file is not used confirm the following item using the manuals of network devices in advance The operations for network devices backup methods and restore methods When using the network devices of redundancy configurations replace network devices in the following order 1 Replace network devices with standby status 64 2 Setthe status of the
55. folders ereate folders deswoy folders update Creation folders create Modification folders update 16 2 Audit Logs This section explains audit logs By looking up audit logs it is possible to find out who performed what operation when 16 2 1 Configuration Management Audit Log This section explains the configuration management audit log 140 The file name file size and number of generations of the audit log are shown below e UM N f Log name Description File size Mud generations 10 vsys audit log Audit logs are output to this log generations Note If the number of saved generations exceeds 10 generations old generations will be deleted starting with the oldest generation The file size and the number of generations to be saved can be changed Refer to Procedure for changing the size of the file and Procedure for changing the number of generations to be saved for details With default settings audit logs will be held for approximately 50 days if 10 people use this product for approximately one hour per day per person If necessary back up audit logs at appropriate intervals according to the usage frequency The names of the files to be backed up are shown below vsys audit log n where n is the generation number Example To back up three generations worth of files the names of the files to be backed up are as follows vsys audit log 1 vsys audit log 2 vsys audit
56. how to register application process assessor 8 1 2 Deleting an Application Process Assessor This section explains how to delete an infrastructure administrator or dual role administrator from the application process assessors 8 1 2 1 Deleting an Infrastructure Administrator dual role Administrator from IflowUsers Group Follow the procedure below to delete an infrastructure administrator or dual role administrator from the IflowUsers group members For OpenDS 1 Create an LDIF file Edit a sample LDIF file to create the file An example of an LDIF file is shown below 21 Delete manager from IflowUsers dn cn IflowUsers ou group dc fujitsu dc com changetype modify delete member member cn manager ou users dc fujitsu dc com Execute the ldapmodify command Windows Manager Specify the created LDIF file and then execute the ldapmodify command OpenDS Installation_folder bat ldapmodify bat p port number f lt ldif file gt D administrator user DN w password An execution example is shown below c gt c Program Files x86 NFujitsuMServerView Suite opends bat ldapmodify p 1473 D cn Directory Manager w admin f c ldif deleteuserfromgroup ldif Processing MODIFY request for cn IflowUsers ou group dc fujitsu dc com MODIFY operation successful for DN cn IflowUsers ou group dc fujitsu dc com Linux Manager Specify the created LDIF file and then execute the Idapmodify co
57. ia estie eee Pueden dud S9 Solbes for Evont Los D itput Tor CMDB JOH ooa te orar Re be Ee e i redi nib ere erede x pa glue HEEL 42 Ghapier Nri LAINE a MERE 43 KAP Lo 43 9 2 Blade Server iiis 47 AE T 6 3 MS o EA E AA E E AA E E EE E AER 47 92 2 Recounniradon of Hardware POS eres reete de pee rr ete nein inaa ERER cete EE EA EAE IHRE EUSEB ERIS E AENEA 48 902 3 RE LAGI SOPVOIS cerei rienittenm pet t energie eater EE chit Fete E pe ert ee idein esti ed 49 DA Replocins Non Server Hard WaR ee orate irre tetra dr a n rh Ot ree rodea beatos a tied ddr benedi eddie 51 9 5 Maut naguce Tor Servers Other Than Blade Setvetg 5cn item th eh e iret Rhe bec ra ENS ee ad 52 2 3 1 Recontignratiom ot Hardware Properties eiecit iere RE eet eb perte ORC EET ESS Ei ONEST ERE eR T E AEn possi 52 DES Pe UA TG sang ccd oem aene teca deberse nba ep de Deis erudi ede Ep e pte vtae re reet eed 54 9 3 3 Replacing and Adding Server Compcofiiils n dete orm rer eere iro eme e idit enn dere ie e E er elici 58 03 4 Replacing Noneserver BArddgR iuuueei tte entrer eti eoe ree i e sik ed e FE euin deese eei e EX Eee id 60 94 Por servers mot Using Server MaDaposent SONWANE 1 eie rtr a he cire He a e ia 60 925 Network Device NIaitfendliog oett aeree ret e e ier ED tae i d Pre e OE d 61 9 5 1 Replacement Procedure of Network Devices iesenii tham tra tte bred b nre SE
58. inserted in its new slot Pre Configuration For PRIMERGY BX servers the hardware properties are automatically re configured If automatic re configuration is not necessary for PRIMERGY BX servers delete the following file and then restart the manager Placeholder for the Definition File Windows Manager Installation_folder SVROR Manager etc customize_data Linux Manager etc opt FJS Vrcvmr customize data Name of the Definition File auto replace rcxprop Re configuring Hardware Properties after Server Replacement If the definition file has already been created there is no need to set the hardware information again If the definition file has not been created use the following procedure to re configure properties for replaced hardware 48 1 After hardware replacement insert the server and check that the following message is displayed in the event log Server blade added After the message is displayed shut down the server if it is still powered on 2 After approximately 30 seconds right click the target server in the ROR console server resource tree and select Hardware Maintenance Re configure from the popup menu The Re configure Hardware Properties dialog is displayed 3 Click OK The original hardware properties of the selected managed server are updated with new hardware properties obtained from the replacement server If the maintenance LED is on it will be turned off automatically amp Not
59. java sun com dtd properties dtd properties omitted entry key use charge gt yes lt entry gt entry key charge host gt localhost lt entry gt entry key charge port gt 3550 lt entry gt entry key charge uri gt resource verl 0 lt entry gt omitted lt properties gt 3 Open the following file Windows Manager Installation_folder RCXCTMG MyPortal config custom_config xml Linux Manager etc opt FJSVctmyp config custom config xml 4 The following information must be modified estimation mode 1 Specifies whether usage fee the estimated price for the L Platform template will be displayed 3 Display 0 Do not display Set to 3 if use charge in vsys config xml is set to yes or to 0 if use charge is set to no compatible estimation When overcommit is enabled specify whether to 2 calculate usage fee the estimated price using the operating value or the reserved value true Calculate using operating value CPU performance and or memory capacity false Calculate using reserved value reserved CPU performance and or reserved memory capacity this can be set by Setup Wizard on the ROR Console 2 These settings are only valid when the overcommit function is enabled Refer to 19 6 Settings for the Overcommit Function in the Setup Guide CE for further details Note also that these settings are only valid when either VMware or Hyper V is used as
60. network device before replacement to standby and replace the device When replacing multiple network devices of redundancy configurations simultaneously perform replacement operations in units of the same redundancy configurations When the network device to replace has failed step 4 cannot be performed It is recommended to back up environments regularly in preparation for failures of network devices When performing regular backup of environments the load of restoration operations after replacement of network devices can be reduced by using the latest backup environment 9 5 2 Regular Maintenance Procedure of Network Devices This section explains the procedure of regular maintenance patch application or firmware update of network devices Use the following procedure when performing maintenance operations while continuing operations using the network devices of redundancy configurations by switching between active and standby When there is no description the following operations are performed by an infrastructure administrator l 2 7 Announce that regular maintenance operations are being started Confirm that the network device that is the target of regular maintenance is in standby status by directly logging in to the network device Back up the current network device configuration file from the network device with standby status When the management function for network device configuration files is used
61. network devices refer to 9 2 3 Settings for Managed Network Devices in the Design Guide CE For details on how to create network configuration information XML definition refer to 14 6 Network Configuration Information in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on the rexadm netdevice command refer to 3 8 rexadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on ruleset creation and the registration destinations refer to F 3 Creating a Folder for Registering Rulesets in the Setup Guide CE For details on the rexadm network command refer to 3 9 rexadm network in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on how to register a resource in a resource pool refer to Chapter 19 Resource Operations in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE 9 5 3 2 Adding Firewalls Server Load Balancers and L2 Switches for Additional Tenants This section explains the procedure for addition assuming a case where it is necessary to add a network device or a server in order to add a tenant The explanation is mainly about operations related to firewalls server load balancers and L2 switches When there is no description the following operations are performed by an infrastructure administrator 68 Figure 9 6 Image of Tenants to Add Ces He Access Switch Access Switch Access Switch Access Switch L2 Switch L2 Switch L2 Switch
62. not enclosed with double quotes Format ZZZZZZZZZZZ9 2 Example 800 FileVersion This is the version of the file Fixed as 1 0 LplatformId This is the L Platform ID 1 LplatformName This is the L Platform name 1 LplatformDeletedDate Date that the L Platform was returned Output only if the L Platform has already been returned Empty string is output if this has not been returned 132 Format Y Y Y Y MM DD HH mm ss SSS 1 Example 2013 03 31 23 59 59 999 ChargeAmount The amount of usage charges for each L Platform The amounts are values so they are not enclosed with double quotes Format ZZZZZZZZZZ29 2 Example 1000 Data enclosed with double quotes 2 The amount is shown only without the currency symbol The following is an example of file output TenantName TenantDisplayName TenantDeletedDate Date TotalChargeAmount FileVersion LplatformId Lplat formName LplatformDeletedDate ChargeAmount TNT00001 tenant01 2012 02 01 09 30 40 001 2012 02 1800 1 0 n nn nr TNTO0001 LPlatformO1 template TNTOOO01 LPlatform01 2012 01 10 09 30 40 001 1000 n pnn mn mn TNTOOOO1 LPlatform02 template TNTO0OOO1 LPlatform02 800 15 4 6 2 Usage charge Detail File The usage charge detail file is a file in CSV format showing the breakdown of usage charges for each L Platform The output items are as follows TenantDisplayName This is the display name
63. of L Platform Explains the management of L Platforms Chapter 8 Changing Settings Explains how to modify various setting information Section 3 Maintenance Chapter 9 Hardware Maintenance Explains the maintenance of hardware 10 1 Backup and Restoration of Admin Servers Explains how to use the backup and restore provided by Resource Orchestrator Section 4 Monitoring Chapter 11 Monitoring Resources Explains how to monitor the configuration and status of managed resources li Chapter 12 Collecting Power Consumption Data and Displaying Graphs Explains how to export the power consumption data collected from registered power monitoring targets and how to display it as graphs and also describes the exported data s format Chapter 13 Monitoring Resource Pools Dashboard Explains the monitoring of resource pools Chapter 14 Monitoring L Platforms Explains the monitoring of L Platforms Chapter 15 Accounting Explains charging Chapter 16 Monitoring Logs Explains the monitoring of logs Section 5 High Availability Chapter 17 High Availability of Managed Resources Explains failover Chapter 18 Disaster Recovery Explains the Disaster Recovery function for L Servers Appendix A Notes on Operating ServerView Resource Orchestrator Gives important reminders for the operation of Resource Orchestrator Appendix B Metering Log Explains metering logs Glossary Explains the terms used in this manual Please refer to it
64. of L Servers and resources 3 Physical L Server registration deletion movement usage changes power operations conversion and Not Information related to image files r version Required After the registration and unregistration of VM hosts 15 Necessity of Target Resources When Backup is Necessary Stopping Remarks Managers Note If the following definition files are to be backed up the Manager must be stopped and offline backup must be performed Some L Platform management Definition files Modification of definition files No Note setings Tenant management and account management settings Operational status server list settings CMDB agent event log output settings After rcxadm imagemgr command Not Image management information operations Required Creation change deletion move or D o Metering information power operation of an L Platform or Required L Server Home window announcement Announcement change information License agreement when users are added License agreement change t Dashboard information As required es backup as required Because it is updated as needed Operational status information As required es stop the Manager and take a backup as required Because it is updated as needed stop the Manager and take a Application to use modify or cancel HAE an L Platform or approval Application information AME PP assessment dismissal or cancellat
65. of Network Appliance Inc in the US and other countries Data ONTAP Network Appliance and Snapshot are trademarks of Network Appliance Inc in the US and other countries Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates in the United States and other countries Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates Red Hat RPM and all Red Hat based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Red Hat Inc in the United States and other countries SUSE is a registered trademark of SUSE LINUX AG a Novell business VMware the VMware boxes logo and design Virtual SMP and VMotion are registered trademarks or trademarks of VMware Inc in the United States and or other jurisdictions ServerView and Systemwalker are registered trademarks of FUJITSU LIMITED All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Notices The contents of this manual shall not be reproduced without express written permission from FUJITSU LIMITED The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice Month Year Issued Edition November 2011 First Edition October 2012 Third Edition Copyright FUJITSU LIMITED 2010 2012 viii Contents PPM Wt ROW E D m 1 Chapter 1 Overview of Operations Maintenance and MonitoriBg 2 reete terne nernittnai 2 1 1 Operation M
66. on If off has been specified the window for directly registering a tenant user will be displayed when registering a tenant user Specify on if the tenant management is to be performed and specify off if itis not to be performed The initial value is off If off has been specified the Tenant tab will not be displayed on the ROR Console When setting the user s password in tenant management configure the settings to on to include the new password in the body of the password change notification email or to off when not including the password in the email The default value is set to on A new password will be included in the body of the password change notification email in the event that this value is omitted and or the key is undefined Specify on if changing user account is to be performed using the account management and specify off if it is not to be performed The initial value is on If off has been specified the Change user account button will not be displayed in the Account window of the account management Specify on if changing user password is to be performed using the account management and specify off if it is not to be performed The initial value is on If off has been specified the Change user password button will not be displayed in the Account window of the account management leftMenu modifyUser user visible Setting for tenant user Specify on if changing user
67. per CPU and Unit price per CPU clock CPU clock Example An example price calculation is shown below assuming following conditions Conditions CPU Clock 0 10 0 1GHz CPU 0 80 unit Example calculation Price for a CPU of 3 2GHz 0 10 32 0 80 4 00 Price for two CPUs each of 1 0GHz 0 10 10 0 80 2 3 60 2 When a physical L Server is to be newly deployed estimated price for the CPU performance and memory capacity will be calculated according to the values entered on the L Platform Management window The physical L Server that is actually deployed will have performance that is closest to the value that was entered on the L Platform Management window Accordingly estimated price displayed may differ to the actual price For physical L Servers that have already been deployed estimated price will be calculated based on the actual CPU performance and memory capacity 3 Estimated price for data disk capacity are added according to disk capacity usage for each storage pool with no differentiation between extension disks and existing disks Note also that if the same existing disk is attached to multiple L Servers at this time calculations for the existing disk capacity will be added together in accordance with the number of L Servers to which the disk is attached Resource allocation methods differ between extension disks and existing disks For this reason the storage pool used for an existing disk should n
68. pese e cpu reserve Reserve value of CPU Numeric performance memory reserve Reserve value of memory Numeric capacity server template name L Server template name 30 cpu_input_num Value entered for number of Numeric CPUs 31 cpu_input_perf Value entered for CPU Numeric frequency 32 memory_input_size Value entered for memory Numeric capacity An output example of a CSV format file is shown below version event_time Reserved vsys_id org_id event resource_type status user_id server_id disk_id sof tware id system name server name disk name template id Reserved base template id image name storage pool disk size vm poo l cpu num cpu perf memory size cpu reserve memory reserve server template name server pool cpu input num cpu input perf Inemory input size template name 2 0 2011 07 02T00 00 00 000 0900 vsysIG001 orgId001 ADD pserver userId001 serverI d001 systemName001 ServerName001 image00 StoragePool001 100 1 3 6 sSserverTemplateName001 serverPool001 2 5 8 2 0 2011 08 08T710 20 10 0004 0900 org Td0OOTI PERIOD template useridddi 77 7 WUWIPIQQQIM M um mmimmo ua oe pr Er pr Pe Dame UNL Y o Pont OE Oar th VU ObOA UDINE te Hee eenSC ON Ey Mena RISO ap UEA Ree aden Ome userId001 ser 185 Verld00l F aoitwareld00l systemNameQgU s m nw mnm nm mm WW Wm EIGqpyI shs 2 0 2011 08 08T10 20 10
69. postgresql conf WAL save directory WAL save directory Operational settings file for online backup ctmgbackup properties Backup directory Stopping the Manager Stop the manager For details on how to stop the manager refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager Changing the Backup Destination Directory This section describes how to change the backup destination directory based on the example shown below Windows Manager Bef pn C Fujitsu ROR RCXCTMG backup data Backup directory change After change D basebackup Bef hee C Fujitsu ROR RCXCTMG backup wal WAL save directory change After change E walbackup Linux Manager Bef i var opt FJS Vctchg backup data Backup directory change After change basebackup Before WAL save directory change After change walbackup var opt FJS Vctchg backup wal 1 Create a new backup directory Windows Manager D RETURN cd RETURN mkdir basebackup Charging RETURN E RETURN cd RETURN mkdir walbackup Charging RETURN Linux Manager mkdir basebackup RETURN mkdir walbackup RETURN 89 2 Set access privileges for users connected with the database for the directory Windows Manager gt cacls D basebackup Charging T E G rcxctdbchg F RETURN gt cacls E walbackup Charging T E G rexctdbchg F RETURN Linux Manager chown R rcxctdbdhg rcxctdbchg baseba
70. priority level set to 0 will not startup or shutdown when performing bundled power supply operations An information message will be output to vsys trace log for any server that did not startup or shutdown If any server that either did not startup or shutdown actually needs to be started up or shut down refer to the information message and use the StartLServer or StopLServer command to startup or shutdown individually Refer to 2 3 5 StartLServer Starts a Server and 2 3 6 StopLServer Stops a Server in the Reference Guide API for details on this command 7 2 6 Action to Take when an Error has Occurred When an error has occurred during a cancellation application by a tenant user the cancellation application may become impossible In that case confirm the system ID of the L Platform and use the Disable L Platform Application command to make the cancellation application possible again for the user For information on the Disable L Platform Application command refer to 12 12 recoverService Disable L Platform Application in the Reference Guide Command XML CE When a Problem Occurs during L Platform Operation The flow of when a problem occurs after the following operations for an L Platform are implemented by a tenant user is as below Creation modification or deletion of an L Platform 217 Configuration or modification of network devices such as firewalls or server load balancers Figure 7 1 Flow of Correcti
71. recorded Execute the command shown below For details on the command refer to 6 6 rexmgrbackup in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Windows Manager gt Installation_folder SVROR Manager bin rcxmgrbackup dir directory base cleanup RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrcvmr bin rcxmgrbackup dir directory base cleanup RETURN 82 Note The backup command may not end normally at times so do not perform the following operations Forced end using Ctrl C during execution of the backup command Stopping the Manager during execution of the backup command If the operations listed above have been performed the following action will be required depending on the status Execute the command shown below the next time and any subsequent times the base backup does not end normally When this command is executed base backup will end normally For details on the command refer to 12 10 ctmg resetbackuperror Recover Base Backup Error in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Installation folder NRCXCTMGWbinNctmg resetbackuperror bat The processing result is output as standard output The contents and meaning of the processing result are shown in the table below Normal end eo Successfully reset the base backup error Error Other than 0 Failed to reset the base backup error If starting of the Manager fails When operations continue after a while without the command mentioned above ctmg_res
72. rename function is used The WWN is reset to its factory set value when the server is deleted from Resource Orchestrator Before using HBAs in an environment that is not managed by Resource Orchestrator first delete the server in which it is mounted using the ROR console For details on how to delete a server refer to 9 2 Deleting Managed Servers in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE The WWN of a managed server is set during startup using a network boot session to connect to the admin server Once set up with a proper WWN the managed server reboots into its own Operating System Therefore a managed server may reboot during its startup Do not move HBAs whose HBA address rename settings have been set up to different managed servers If operating HBAs without resetting their WWNs when the same WWN is configured on multiple servers data may be damaged by same volume access Changing the Manager s System Time When the admin server s system time is reset to a time in the past the resource monitoring by the manager stops for this period To reset the system time to more than just a few minutes in the past return the time and then restart the manager For details on how to restart the manager refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager Restarting Managers By default the manager services restart at 3 45 am every day for stable system operation The settings for restarting can be changed depe
73. replacement have been solved Notification that maintenance operations are complete 9 5 1 2 When Device that is Target of Restoration is undamaged This section explains replacement procedure when network device that is target of restoration is undamaged 62 When the management function for network device configuration files is not used 1 2 Qv Se oP 18 ex 9 10 Announcement of planned maintenance operations Log in the network device directly to check if the target network device of replacement is in active status or standby status When the target network device of replacement is in active status switch over the device with the standby network device of redundancy configuration and change the status of target network device for replacement from active status to standby status Change the target network device to the maintenance mode Back up the current environment such as definitions from the network devices that are switched to maintenance mode Replace the network devices Hardware maintenance person Restore configuration of replaced network device using environment backed up in procedure 4 along by maintenance procedure of network device Back up the current definitions from the network devices with operational status Check that there are no differences in the definitions in the redundancy configurations using environments backed up in 7 and environment definitions backed up in 4 When there is dif
74. results of sending log the usage charge file are output 2 This log file is 5 MB in size and holds 5 generations 2 Refer to Chapter 9 Messages Starting with ctact in the Messages for information on the execution result that is output 16 4 Investigation Logs This section explains investigation logs Investigation logs are used as maintenance information when investigating and dealing with errors 16 4 1 Investigation Logs on Admin Servers The investigation logs on Admin Servers are classified into the following types ie UE Number of Log name Description File size generations vsys trace log Trace logs for the management of L Platform template and L 10MB 10 Platform are output to this log generations vsys_batch_log Trace logs for the batch processing section of the management 9 of L Platform template and L Platform are output to this log myportal trace log Trace logs for the Manager View are output to this log cfmg api log Logs for the CFMG APIs are output to this log Event log Information such as errors that occur while the Manager View is being used is output to this log Refer to Chapter 20 Messages Starting with VSYS in the Messages for information on event logs Note If this number is exceeded old generations will be deleted starting with the oldest generation Output Destination The log output destinations are shown below Windows Manager Output folder Output destination file
75. settings log amp type log amp day frequency of output of periodic day of output of periodic log n listMlogSch Get a list of periodic usez yeslno amp timez tzme of output of periodic log schedule log amp typez frequency of output of periodic nnn settings log amp day lt day of output of periodic log nn n listMeteringlog Get a list of startz start date of the acquisition period gt amp endz end metering logs date of the acquisition period gt nn amp type eventlperiod deleteMlog Delete metering retention lt og entry retention period gt logs Accounting listLplatformCha Get a list of usage GUI rge charge for each L operations Platform from the ROR Console getDetailCharge Get a breakdown of L Platform usage charges listTenantCharge Get a list of usage charge for each tenant listLplatformCha Get a list of usage rgeByTenant charge for each L Platform under the specified tenant downloadFile File download targetz LplatformChargeListlDetailChargelTenantChargeListl LplatformChargeListByTenant Accounting cio Getresource usage None Published dias operation frequency registerUsagePoi Register usage date lt date of data registered gt 5 amp id lt L Platform nt frequency 4 ID gt amp name lt L Platform name gt amp tenantnamez name of managed tenant amp tenantdeletedate lt date
76. system resource folder An arbitrary group of resources resource pool A unit for management of groups of similar resources such as servers storage and network devices resource tree A tree that displays the relationships between the hardware of a server and the OS operating on it using hierarchies role A collection of operations that can be performed ROR console The GUI that enables operation of all functions of Resource Orchestrator ruleset A collection of script lists for performing configuration of network devices configured as combinations of rules based on the network device the purpose and the application SAN Storage Area Network A specialized network for connecting servers and storage SAN boot A configuration function that enables the starting and operation of servers via a SAN The OS and applications used to operate servers are stored on SAN storage not the internal disks of servers SAN storage Storage that uses a Fibre Channel connection script list Lists of scripts for the automation of operations such as status and log display and definition configuration of network devices Used to execute multiple scripts in one operation The scripts listed in a script list are executed in the order that they are listed As with individual scripts they can are created by the infrastructure administrator and can be customized to meet the needs of tenant administrators They are used to confi
77. the cloning image If the cloning image has been updated the resource ID will be changed so the image information must be updated in order to return the resource ID back to its previous setting If the cloning image has been updated use an operation from the Template window to update the image information Refer to 8 3 8 Synchronizing Image Information in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administratorsfor CE details Point To use both cloning masters the cloning master before the update and the cloning master after the update in the L Platform template updating a single cloning master will not work Instead these cloning masters must be collected separately 006060606020006060600606009090909900009009099909909000009090909909090009090099909909060009000990990900000090990999090900000009929006000099090000009299 7 2 3 Importing to L Platform This section explains how to import physical servers virtual machines and L Servers to an L Platform There are the following two ways of importing physical servers virtual machines and L Servers to the L Platform Management function Convert configured physical servers or virtual machines into L Servers then import the converted L Servers to the L Platform Follow the procedure described below to convert configured physical servers or virtual machines into L Servers and import to the L Platform a Convert the physical servers or virtual machines into L Servers Refer to Use of Phys
78. the date and time at which periodic backup is to start Example Set a date of the 1st of the following month and 3 00 00 7 In the Months field select the Select all months checkbox 8 In the Days field select the 1 checkbox 9 Click Next 10 Select Start a program as the task action and click Next 11 Click Browse and in the Program script field set the batch files for base backup j7 Example C work backupall bat Gecho off echo Resource Manager Cloud Edition Resources backup Start call Installation folder NSVRORMManagerNMbinNrcxmgrbackup directory storage destination folder base echo Resource Manager Cloud Edition Resources backup End For details on the rexmgrbackup command refer to 6 6 rexmgrbackup in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 00606060606060009229900000000009090909990909000000090090909209090006000600000009909909090090900000000999999000606006000062929299 12 In the Add arguments optional field set a character string to be used for outputting the command output to log files Example gt gt F backup backupall log 2 gt amp 1 13 Click lt Next gt 14 Check the task settings and if they are correct click lt Finish gt Settings for Periodic Execution of Differential Backup Specify settings so that a differential backup is taken periodically This section describes an example of a setup procedure for saving a differential backup every hour 85
79. the different rules scripts Even when using a model for which sample scripts are prepared and when using a model with definitions configured using different rules scripts amp Note Details of sample scripts may be reviewed and modified When using rulesets modified from prepared sample scripts the modified details will be cleared by replacing the modified scripts with the sample scripts when updating sample scripts In order to prevent this type of problem when creating scripts by referring to sample scripts create the new rulesets after copying the rulesets of the sample script and perform necessary modifications 0606006000200020920909909000000000909099099099090000000099090990090909000000090909292099000000000000929999 0e2s06060600600000206299299 7 Create a tenant and register a tenant administrator 8 Back up environments using the functions provided by the firewall and server load balancer Backups can be used for restoration when replacing firewalls or server load balancers due to device failure For details on how to back up environments refer to the manuals of the firewall and server load balancer being used 9 Register additional servers firewalls and server load balancers in a resource pool for tenants as resources wA See For details on the initial configurations of network devices refer to 9 2 3 Settings for Managed Network Devices in the Design Guide CE For details on how to create network configurat
80. the number of Definition files files backed up Image management information Please prepare the backup area referring to this size to need only the Home window announcement information area of less than 1 MB even if these 100 files are stored by 10 KB License agreement when users are added or less any file Terms of use or terms of cancellation of L Platform Offline backup The size increases and decreases to the file backed up in proportion to the increase and decrease at the number of resources of metering Metering information objects and the retention period of the metering log Online backup 1 KB The size increases and decreases to the file backed up in proportion to the increase and decrease of the number of L Server templates and the number of tenants Dashboard information Please prepare the backup area referring to the following formulas when there are 10 L Server templates defined When the number of tenants is 100 about 6 6 GB is necessary disk space 67 0 55 5 number of tenants 1 2 MB Usage condition information The size increases and decreases to the file backed up according to the operating environment Please calculate the total of the amount of disk under the control of the following directories and prepare the backup area of the amount Windows Manager system driv SWRBADBY If the directory exists Installation foldeNSSWRBAM Installation foldeNSSWOMGR Linux Manager A
81. the virtual software If any other virtual 35 software is used the usage fee the estimated price will be calculated using the operating value regardless of whether or not overcommit is enabled or disabled A setting example is shown below lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 lt properties gt lt entry key estimation mode gt 3 lt entry gt lt entry key compatible estimation gt true lt entry gt omitted lt properties gt 5 Restart the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to restart the manager 8 7 2 Currency Information Settings Currency information can be changed Default setting is USD The currency that can be used is shown below United States Dollar Deed IR LL To change the currency information perform the following procedure 1 Stop the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to stop the manager 2 Execute the Change currency information setting command to change the currency information Refer to 10 3 currencyset Change Currency Information Setting in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on how to use the Change currency information setting command 3 Start the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to start the manager amp Note Determine the currency used when installing the system Do not change the currency infor
82. true Selects from a list box the values to be set that show the distribution ratio of memory The values to be set are as follows Standard 1 000 3 Save the file 28 4 Restart the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to restart the manager 8 5 5 Application Process Settings This section explains how to modify the application process settings 8 5 5 1 How to Modify the Application Process Settings This section explains how to modify the setting whether to use the application process Note 06062002000909299090000090909920990900009099090000000900990990909000009909099000000090990909909000000909099099090990009099099090000090990000009999 If the application process is being changed from use to do not use after the manager starts its operation make sure that there are no pending processes before changing it If there are pending processes finish all of them by cancelling approving rejecting accepting or dismissing each of them Refer to 19 2 Application Process Settings in the Setup Guide CE for information on how to change the setting for whether or not an application process is used 8 5 5 2 How to Modify Application Process to be Used This section explains how to modify the application process to be used G amp Note If the application process to be used is being changed after the manager starts its operation make sure that there are no pending processes
83. when tenant nm managed tenant was deleted gt 6 getDailyCharge Get daily usage None charges registerDailyCha Register daily usage date lt date of data registered gt amp id L Platform m rge charges 4 ID amp name lt L Platform name gt amp tenantname tenant 151 Operation type Operation information 1 name of managed tenant gt amp tenantdeletedate date when managed tenant was deleted mud pe ge registerMonthly Register monthly datez date of data registered gt amp id L Platform Charge usage charges 4 ID amp namez L Platform name amp tenantnamez tenant name of managed tenant amp tenantdeletedate date when managed tenant was deleted getTenants Get tenant None information mn my Access updateAuthority Access authority roleid lt role name of modification target my Control modifications amp actionid lt action ID of modification target gt mn nm amp permission lt allow deny status of specified action gt The above information will be output as follows one information item when a role name is specified or if a file is specified the number of information items will match the number of action IDs System dispUsageStatus Display usage condition condition 4 If a value is not set for an item is output An example is shown below amp globalpool 2 If multipl
84. when the resource is started and when it is stopped Usage time is aggregated according to the following rules Usage time under one hour in minutes Each day s usage time is aggregated as minutes Rounding Times are rounded off to the nearest minute Times 30 seconds and over are counted as 1 minute Times less than 30 seconds are counted as 0 minutes The following shows an example of an L Server deployed time and operated time This example shows when an L Server is added at 7 00 started at 7 40 stopped at 18 20 and then deleted at 19 00 7 00 add 7 00 FEX a rH ER E EL E E 730 statt e 8 00 m m deployed time operated time 12hours 10hours 40minutes 18 00 oPprerrerer a ts eat aS 18 20 stop 19 00 deletel9 00 7 77 77 77 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 22222999229222 2400 n 15 4 3 How to Charge for Resources Resources can be charged by a fixed rate or by the amount used With fixed charging the usage charges are charged according to a fixed fee rather than the usage time of the resources With charging by the amount used the usage charges are charged according to the usage time of the resources Unit codes for the charge information are used when charging Fixed charging is used when either year or month is specified as the unit code Charging by amount is used when hour is specified as the unit code The following table shows the relationships between the u
85. 00 series For restoration of network device file please refer to 10 2 3 Restoration of Network Devices For maintenance procedure of network device please refer to manual of network device Back up the current network device files from the network devices with operational status If the content of the backed up device configuration file is up to date this step is not required If the content is not the up to date take a backup of the network device configuration file using the rexadm netdevice cfbackup command The date and time of backup can be checked using the rcxadm netdevice cflist command Check that there are no differences in the definitions that become a problem in the redundancy configurations using the network device file used in 4 and the network device configuration file in the network device file backed up in 7 Export each network device configuration file with rexadm netdevice cfexport command and check the difference When there is difference that becomes a problem please resolve difference following maintenance procedure of network devices For procedure maintenance of network device please refer to manual of network devices Release the maintenance mode of network devices when problems with network devices after replacement have been solved Notification that maintenance operations are complete WR See When checking configuration of network device you may not confirm it from network device environment
86. 0009200906000009990900000909000909000000009909909000000909090000009090990900000000990900000099900000000090900000090299 Stopping the manager Stop the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to stop the manager Tenant Management Settings The procedure for changing the setting of the tenant management is as follows 1 Open the following file Windows Manager Installation folderNRCXCTMGNSecurityManagementNconfMportal properties Linux Manager 231 etc opt FJSVctsec conf portal properties 2 The following information must be modified visible tenantuser provisional acount allowUpdate setPassword tenantadmin mailwithpasswd leftMenu modifyUser admin visible leftMenu changePassword admin visible Setting for infrastructure administrators operation Setting for tenant administrator operation 32 Specify on if both tenant administrators and tenant users are to be displayed in the user list for the tenant management and specify off if only tenant administrators are to be displayed The initial value is on If off has been specified the tenant users will not be displayed in the User List window of the tenant management Specify on if a provisional account of a tenant user is to be created when the tenant management is to be used to register the tenant user and specify off if the tenant user is to be registered directly The initial value is
87. 060000009209909000900000009090909090590990000000090909009090900000000000909099990909090900000000900909099099099000000000909999 4 In the Name field enter a task name for example Periodic WAL switching and click the Next button 5 Select Daily as the task trigger and click the Next button 6 In the Start field set the date and time at which online backup WAL is to start Example Set the date of the following day and 0 00 00 7 In the Recur every field set 1 day set by default 8 Click the Next button 9 Select Start a program as the task action and click the Next button 10 Click the Browse button and in the Program script field set the batch files for online backup WAL Example C work hourlybackup bat echo off echo Resource Manager Cloud Edition Resources backup Start call Installation_folder SVROR Manager bin rcxmgrbackup dir storage destination folder echo Resource Manager Cloud Edition Resources backup End For details on the rexmgrbackup command refer to 6 6 rexmgrbackup in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 11 In the Add arguments optional field set a character string to be used for outputting the command output to log files Example gt gt F backup backupall log 2 gt amp 1 12 Click the Next button 13 Check the task settings and if they are correct click the lt Finish gt button 14 Select the registered task from the task list and select Action Pr
88. 06009009909090000000990990900000090990990900000090909909090000090990990000009090990090000000909909900900000090990900000009090990909000090299 G amp Note This data should only be used as a reference to evaluate the power consumption status It should not be used as an exact power consumption measurement for billing purposes 000060292092099900060909929000909099002909909000090990909000090090090922009099909200900000920909909920000909929090000009299090200099299 12 2 Exporting Power Consumption Data For details of how to export power consumption data refer to 13 1 Exporting Power Consumption Data in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrator Resource Management CE 12 3 Power Consumption Data File CSV Format This section explains the power consumption data file format CSV format Each defined item of the exported power consumption data is separated by a comma Each line is exported in the following format Data format Data is exported using the following format Time power monitoring target name data type Lpower monitoring target name data type timel datal datal time 2 data2 data2 Header line The header line contains column titles identifying the data from line 2 and later that is displayed under each column Each column title is set according to the data types that have been selected in the Export Environmental Data power monitoring target type dialog 109 Time T
89. 060600009009000090900908209090000909209090000090909209099090000909090990990900000900900090000090900990990909000090090909290000009209000060690299 B 2 Output Contents of Metering Logs The contents that are output to metering logs will vary according to the resource The following tables show the log contents that are output in common for all resources as well as the log contents that are output for each resource Common Item ID Output for each event Item name Description ADD CHAN DELET START STOP PERIO GE E D version Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Fixed at 2 0 event time Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Time event String occurred YYYY MM DDThh mm ss SSSZ 179 Item ID Outputforeachevent for each event Item name Description Blk CHAN iEn START STOP dee event Event ADD Deploy CHANGE Change DELETE Delete START Start STOP Stop PERIOD Period resource type Configured vsys L Platform resource type vserver Virtual L Server pserver Physical L Server vdisk Expansion disk template L Platform template software Software Yes Output No Not output L Platform In addition to the common items output the following items will be output Item ID Output for each event Item name Description ERIS CHANGE DELETE PERIOD org id Yes Tenant name ASCII 1 to 32 characters Name of the tenant user_id Yes Yes User account ASCII 1 to 32 characters User that owns the L Platform vsys id Yes Yes L Platform ID ASCII
90. 090000909909090000009090290909909900009090909909909000009009099000000090920009000000000990900060000909000009999 8 9 Settings for Event Log Output for CMDB Agent This section explains how to change the settings that determine whether the start end messages for CMDB agent information collection are output to event logs Use the following procedure to change the settings that determine whether to prevent start end messages from being output to event logs or not 1 Open the following files Windows Manager Installation folderNSWRBAMNCMDBNFJSVcmdbmNaxis2NWEB INFNservicesNMNmdr cfmgNcmdb properties Installation folderNSWRBAMNCMDBNFJSVcmdbmNaxis2NWEB INFNservicesNmdr rorNcmdb properties Linux Manager opt FJSVcmdbm axis2 WEB INF services mdr cfmg cmdb properties opt FJSVcmdbm axis2 WEB INF services mdr ror cmdb properties 2 Setthe following items schedule syslog disable Change the value above A modification example is shown below Change the part in italics Set this item to true to prevent start update messages from being output to event logs or false otherwise Schedule syslog disable true 3 Restart the CMDB Open a command prompt and execute the following commands Windows Manager Installation folderNSWRBAMNCMDBNFJSVcmdbmMoinNVcemdbstop Installation folderNSWRBAMNCMDBNFJSVcmdbmNMoinNcmdbstart Linux Manager opt FJSVcmdbm bin cmdbstop sh opt FJSVcmdbm bin cmdbstart sh 41 Part 3
91. 09090909909000690900909099090060000090909900000092999909000000099290900606000929090006c0c099299 Environment CPU 4CPU 79 Memory Size 16 GB Command processing time offline backup 3 minutes online backup base backup 2 minutes online backup differential backup 2 minutes restore 4 minutes System Restart Point after Restoration In the system operations flow used by this product the restart point of the system will vary according to the timing of the backup of resources Therefore to ensure that the system can restart from the status it had before backup operate the system in accordance with whether offline backup or online backup is used for backup and perform restoration processing in accordance with each backup type Figure 10 1 Schedule for Backup and Restoration of Admin Servers Example k5 is E 3 75 ZX 1 Offline backup 2 Online backup 3 Online backup 1 3 00 a m once per year base backup backup of WAL file 3 00 a m once per month i Example i 12 35 August 1 2011 040 3 Online backup 2 3 Differential backup i backup of WAL file Example EH OA 14 00 August 1 2011 3 Differential backup2 i T e 3 Online backup 3 1 9 backup of WAL file 3 Differential backups H i EH H once every hour Restores up to this time Example 12 00 August 1 2011 The flow of the preceding diagr
92. 1 recoverAllService Disable L Platform Application in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Windows Manager gt Installation_folder RCXCTMG MyPortal bin recoverAllService bat RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVctmyp bin recoverAllService sh RETURN 10 1 4 5 Updating the configuration information in the operational status information Execute the following command to update the configuration for the operational status information For details on the command refer to 12 8 cmdbrefresh Refresh Configuration Information of System Condition in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Windows Manager gt Installation folder SWRBAM CMDB FJSVcmdbm bin cmdbrefresh exe a q RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVcmdbm bin cmdbrefresh sh a q RETURN 10 1 5 Online Backup Settings for Metering Backup resources that use the PostgreSQL point in time recovery PITR mechanism metering resources which are among the resources that are obtained in online backup of the admin server are stored in the directory that has been specified in the settings file regardless of the storage destination specified by the command 88 This section describes how to change the backup destination directory for the online backup of metering resources To change the backup destination directory the files and items in the table shown below must be changed File to be Changed Item to be Changed Operational settings file for the database
93. 1 to 32 characters ID identifying the L Platform comment Yes Yes L Platform UTF 8 1 to 256 characters name Name of the L Platform base template id Yes L Platform ASCII 1 to 32 characters template ID Template ID of the L Platform creation source Yes Output No Not output Virtual L Server In addition to the common items output the following items will be output Item ID Output for each event Item name Description ADD poe DELE STAR STOP ea ME T Yes Tenant name ASCII 1 to 32 characters Name of the tenant User account ASCII 1 to 32 characters User that owns the L Platform 180 E Bal i Item ID Ouputforeahevet for each event Item name Description ADD CHAN DELE ies STOP igi GE TE vsys id L Platform ID ASCII 1 to 32 characters ID identifying the L Platform server_ ce L Server ID ASCII 1 to 64 characters ID identifying the L Server system_name bad ie UTF 8 1 to 256 characters name Name of the L Platform comment server_name L Server name UTF 8 1 to 256 characters Name of the L Server comment ASCII 1 to 32 characters VM pool name Variable length string unlimited image name name cpu num No Number of 1 to 999999 CPUs Value entered to 999999 for number of CPUs cpu perf Yes Yes No No No Yes CPU to 999999 Unit 0 1 GHz performance Maximum 99999 9 GHz cpu input perf Yes Yes No No No Yes Value entered 1 to 999999 Unit 0 1 GHz for CPU Maximum 99999 9
94. 578 image_test server_images destroy 2011 03 10 23 51 06 620 userA groupA 25 0105 Starting BX620 1 41 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 _servers create 2011 03 10 23 53 06 437 userA groupA 28 s es Completed BX620 1 41 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 _servers create 2011 03 10 23 53 39 265 userA groupA 2 AO Os Starting BX620 1_42 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 _servers start 2011 03 10 23 54 26 640 userA groupA 2 0 105 Completed BX620 1_42 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 _servers start 2011 03 10 23 54 45 531 userA groupA 27 0 0 Starting BX620 1 43 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 Servers restart 2011 03 10 23 55 26 859 userA groupA 21 0 0 Completed BX620 1 43 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 Servers restart 2011 03 10 23 55 48 953 userA groupA 2 00 Starting BX620 1 44 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 Servers stop 2011 03 10 23 56 26 390 userA groupA 220 04 Completed BX620 1 44 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 Servers stop 2011 03 10 23 57 11 968 userA groupA 2 0 10 Starting BX620 1 46 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 Servers attach 2011 03 10 23 58 21 359 userA groupA PAEO EO Completed BX620 1_46 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 Servers attach 2011 03 10 23 58 35 620 userA groupA 21 0 05 Starting BX620 1 47 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 Servers detach 2011 03 10 23 59 23 343 userA groupA 271 0 0 Completed BX620 1 47 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 Servers detach 2011 03 10 23 59 40 265 userA groupA 2 sig e Starting BX620 1 48 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 Servers migrate 2011 03 00 00 53 984 userA gr
95. 8 R2 Standard VM 0001 0 2012 01 01T00 00 00 000 0900 vm imagel month 500 Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard VM Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard CP 0001 0 2012 01 01T00 00 00 0004 0900 cpu VMHostPool month 100 Xeon5110 Xeon5110 CL 0001 0 2012 01 01T00 00 00 000 0900 cpu_clock VMHostPool month 50 Xeon5110 Xeon5110 ME 0001 0 2012 01 01T00 00 00 000 0900 memory VMHostPool month 200 Standard memory Standard memory DI 0001 0 2012 01 01T00 00 00 000 0900 disk StoragePool month 10 normal disk normal disk G amp Note The accounting information will not be deleted from the product master automatically even after the end of applicable date Reference to 15 3 3 Delete Accounting Information to delete unnecessary accounting information If the end of applicable date is specified prepare other accounting information of the same product ID without specifying the end of applicable date If the overcommit function is enabled the category codes cpu_clock and memory will be calculated by default as CPU reserve performance and memory reserve capacity respectively and usage fee the estimated price will be displayed on the L Platform Management window Refer to 8 7 1 Display Function Settings for Estimated Price for information on charge settings when the overcommit function is enabled 15 3 Operate Accounting Information This section expl
96. Agents for MS Windows 32bit 64bit ServerView Agent ServerView Agents Linux ServerView Agents VMware for VMware ESX Server LNNNNENUTTIT OO TR NN R Coordinat Systemwalker Resource Coordinator esource Coordinator i ast Systemwalker Resource Coordinator Virtual server Edition Export Administration Regulation Declaration Documents produced by FUJITSU may contain technology controlled under the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Control Law of Japan Documents which contain such technology should not be exported from Japan or transferred to non residents of Japan without first obtaining authorization from the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry of Japan in accordance with the above law Trademark Information BMC BMC Software the BMC logos and other BMC marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of BMC Software Inc in the U S and or certain other countries EMC EMC CLARiiON Symmetrix and Navisphere are trademarks or registered trademarks of EMC Corporation HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company vii Linux is a trademark or registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States and other countries Microsoft Windows MS MS DOS Windows XP Windows Server Windows Vista Windows 7 Excel Active Directory and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries NetApp is a registered trademark
97. HBA WWN values For details on how to change WWN information refer to 9 1 12 Changing WWN Settings for ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Integration in the User s Guide VE Replacing a boot disk in local boot environments Use the following procedure to replace a boot disk 1 Replace the faulty boot disk with a new one 2 If the boot disk s content was backed up restore it 59 A Information The backup and restore functions available in Resource Orchestrator can be used to restore the boot disk contents For details refer to Chapter 16 Backup and Restore in the User s Guide VE 660000000090929090000009099090990000090909099090900000909090990900000090909090900000009009000009009092909090900000909909000000090999090909 9 Replacing a System Board The procedure used to replace a system board is the same as that described in 9 3 2 Replacing Servers Replacing an IO Board No specific action is required in Resource Orchestrator when replacing an IO board Replacing Other Server Components No specific action is required in Resource Orchestrator when replacing onboard server components like memory modules or other parts Solaris Containers When replacing adding or removing CPU Add replaced added or removed CPU to the resource pool for Solaris Containers or remove it depending on your environment For details refer to C 7 Solaris Containers in the Setup Guide CE 9 3 4 Replacing Non server Hardware This section
98. ID ASCII 1 to 32 characters ID identifying the L Server software id Software ID ASCII 1 to 32 characters ID identifying the software D L Platform UTF 8 1 to 256 characters name Name of the L Platform comment Yes Output No Not output B 3 Formats of Metering Log Files Metering logs are output to CSV format files or XML format files Use the options of the Output metering log command to specify the format in which metering logs are to be output Refer to 10 2 ctchg getmeterlog Output Metering Logs in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on the Output metering log command This section explains each of the file formats CSV format files The format of CSV format files is as follows The item ID is output with a one byte hash sign added to the first character of the first row tems are output with commas used as delimiters between each item String data is output enclosed by double quotation marks and numeric data is output as it is m fan item is not output using string data is output f an item is not output using numeric data nothing is output A comma is output immediately after the previous item m For a Reserved item is output The order of the items that are output to a CSV format file is as follows De 3e nem cB EML TERN NN RN em m m 184 De 9 Loose coe e few m m o ee eem om eem E LL Ee p
99. ID of the user updated amp mailz xxx 9 com information amp lastname lt ast name gt amp firstnamez first names amp auth infra adminlinfra operatorladministratorlmonitorl operatorltenant adminltenant operatorltenant monitorl tenant user amp explanationz xxxx amp corporatename fujitsu amp emergencymailz yyy com amp emergencytelz 0000 listUser Get a list of user information moveUser Relocate users userid lt user ID of the user that has been relocated gt amp oldorgid tenant name of the original tenant amp neworgid tenant name of the tenant to which the user has been relocated updatePassword Update passwords userid lt user ID of the user whose password has been mm update createOrg Create an tenant With no calculation of Usage Charges 2 3 nn orgid lt tenant name of the tenant that has been a created gt amp orgnamez tenant name gt mn nn n amp mail sep xxx com amp globalpool lt g obal pool that has been With calculation of Usage Charges orgid lt tenant name of the tenant that has been m created gt amp orgnamez tenant my n name gt amp mail xxx com amp globalpool has been set gt amp cutoffdate lt Cut off nn lt global pool that date gt amp accountingmail lt email address where usage charges nun are sent m deleteOrg Delete tenants orgid
100. L Platform A resource used for the consolidated operation and management of systems such as multiple layer systems Web AP DB comprised of multiple L Servers storage and network devices L Platform template A template that contains the specifications for servers storage network devices and images that are configured for an L Platform LSB Logical System Board A system board that is allocated a logical number LSB number so that it can be recognized from the domain during domain configuration L Server A resource defined using the logical specifications number of CPUs amount of memory disk capacity number of NICs etc of the servers and storage and network devices connected to those servers An abbreviation of Logical Server L Server template A template that defines the number of CPUs memory capacity disk capacity and other specifications for resources to deploy to an L Server LUN Logical Unit Number A logical unit defined in the channel adapter of a storage unit MAC address Media Access Control address A unique identifier that is assigned to Ethernet cards hardware Also referred to as a physical address 194 Transmission of data is performed based on this identifier Described using a combination of the unique identifying numbers managed by assigned to each maker by the IEEE and the numbers that each maker assigns to their hardware maintenance mode The state where operations on manage
101. M host belonging to a Resource Pool It handles setting changes and information collection for the Resource Pool and also performs operation of the Resource Pool For details refer to the Citrix XenServer manual port backup A function for LAN switches which is also referred to as backup port port VLAN A VLAN in which the ports of a LAN switch are grouped and each LAN group is treated as a separate LAN port zoning The division of ports of fibre channel switches into zones and setting of access restrictions between different zones power monitoring devices Devices used by Resource Orchestrator to monitor the amount of power consumed PDUs and UPSs with current value display functions fit into this category power monitoring targets Devices from which Resource Orchestrator can collect power consumption data pre configuration Performing environment configuration for Resource Orchestrator on another separate system primary server The physical server that is switched from when performing server switchover primary site The environment that is usually used by Resource Orchestrator 197 private cloud A private form of cloud computing that provides ICT services exclusively within a corporation or organization public LAN A LAN used for operations by managed servers Public LANs are established separately from admin LANs rack A case designed to accommodate equipment such as servers rack mount server
102. NEE ERE ERES E ESAE SERERE REPE EA ERE EEEE eaa 61 9 3 1 1 When device that is targeted to replace 1 DreaEdOSen eee entretenir tette rtt ii iiaiai 61 9 5 1 2 When Device that is Target of Restoration is undamaged nee tte itm er iti Deere 62 9 5 2 Regular Maintenance Procedure of Network Devigat een ertet te tenere teta uasa ta neg E ESSERE EE TEES AREER 65 9 5 0 Procedure for Addition of Network Devit icis irr rtm tr rrr P eren ete d a ere tail 66 9 5 3 1 Adding L2 Switches to Handle Insufficient Numbers of Ports when Adding Servers eee 66 9 5 3 2 Adding Firewalls Server Load Balancers and L2 Switches for Additional Tenants esse 68 9 5 4 Procedure for Addition or Modification of Connection Destinations of Network Devices esee 70 9 6 Shore Device Mantetiatbe tere ecormetimetetqicere tein ei e d ic ERE ee dlc PO ei tete d 9 7 Power Monitoring Device PDU or UPS Maintenance Chapter 10 Backup and Restoration ecnin menina eaa ERa E EA aaa E E EEEE Aa 73 10 1 Backupand Restoration of Adron Servers ient tete i orir aa eese p petro el EU EC botes bl tede irs 73 10 1 1 Mechanism er Backup and RestOratiob 5 205 0 mendntie eene m ee Doe rn ipee e Dei eH PHP bi E 74 10 1 2 Offline Backup of th Admin SEIVSE ese sick etit eher a Eee Ele rubens aao t Ex EYE E ESSE REPRE etant aa oh ue e SEHE Ipsa 80 10 121 Stopping th WORSE iiec re e dre ee ete soa out
103. OP occurs for a stop or a forced stop of an L Server The forced stop of an L Server can be performed even if the L Server has a stopped status STOPPED Therefore take into account that even if an L Server has a stopped status an event indicating a stop of the L Server STOP may exist When starting virtual L Servers using RHEL KVM as virtualization software the amount of memory used by L Servers is set to the upper limit first and then it is reduced to the value specified to L Servers by the RHEL KVM management application Therefore metering logs will be output in the following order if a RHEL KVM L Server is started 1 L Server starting START 2 L Server changing CHANGE Memory capacity The upper limit 3 L Server changing CHANGE The upper limit gt Memory capacity gt The value specified to the L Server 4 L Server changing CHANGE Memory capacity The value specified to the L Server Note The changing log 3 may not be output sometimes Refer to C 6 10 Overcommit in the Setup Guide CE for the RHEL KVM memory amount B 4 Deleting Metering Logs Metering logs are periodically deleted from the database Delete processing is implemented every day at 0 35 and the logs for which the log entry retention period that was set in the metering operational settings file has passed will be deleted When metering logs are deleted accounting can no longer be calculated so set the log entry retention period so that only
104. Orchestrator manager Setup Resource Orchestrator Secondary Node Connection with shared storage Configure BIOS Install Hyper V roles Install and configure EMC Solutions Enabler when used Add a failover clustering function Create a Hyper V virtual network For details on the following items refer to the Hyper V manual Install Hyper V Roles Add a Failover Clustering Function Create a Hyper V Virtual Network Create Clusters Prepare Virtual Machines Register Virtual Machines in Clusters Operation When an error occurs on a VM guest the operation will continue if the VM guest is switched over 170 amp Note When performing configuration modification or deletion of managed server environments such as L Server creation if an error occurs on VM guest the operation may fail In this case part of the environment of the managed server may be created Perform the operation again after deleting created environments When performing L Server creation or ETERNUS configuration information modification using ETERNUS if an error occurs on a VM guest ETERNUS may not be able to return from the status of processing to normal status In this case to restore forcibly log on from ETERNUSmgr then log off In the case of ETERNUS DX60 DX80 DX90 contact Fujitsu technical staff For details on how to restore ETERNUS refer to the ETERNUS manual Manager Cluster Operation in Windows and Linux Environments The s
105. Replacing storage devices No specific action is required in Resource Orchestrator In Resource Orchestrator the settings for storage devices are not restored Restore the settings for storage devices based on the information in hardware manuals Replacing Fibre Channel switches No specific action is required in Resource Orchestrator In Resource Orchestrator the settings for Fibre Channel switches are not restored Restore the settings for Fibre Channel switches based on the information in hardware manuals 9 7 Power Monitoring Device PDU or UPS Maintenance This section explains how to maintain power monitoring devices PDU or UPS Replacing power monitoring devices PDU or UPS After replacing a power monitoring device re configure hardware properties of the power monitoring device PDU or UPS Use the following procedure to replace a power monitoring device 1 Replace the faulty power monitoring device 2 Set the admin LAN IP address and SNMP community on the replacement device to the same values as those that were set on the faulty device 71 3 Re configure the power monitoring device s hardware properties a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target power monitoring device PDU or UPS and from the popup menu select Hardware Maintenance Re configure The Re configure Hardware Properties dialog is displayed b Click OK The target power monitoring device s hardware prope
106. Retention Chapter 9 Hardware Maintenance Chapter 10 Backup and Restoration 42 Chapter 9 Hardware Maintenance This chapter explains how to perform hardware maintenance 9 1 Overview This section explains how to perform maintenance on the hardware devices managed by Resource Orchestrator Hardware Maintenance Flow The flow of maintenance for hardware used to operate an L Platform is shown below Figure 9 1 Flow of Maintenance for L Platform Hardware Infrastructure Tenant Notify Using Notify Users of Home Information Maintenance Operations Notify Using Home Information i Change to Maintenance Status Maintenance Targets Regular Maintenance Implement Maintenance i Release i Maintenance Status Notify Users of Maintenance Operation Completion 1 Notify Users of Maintenance Operations The infrastructure administrator managing hardware devices notifies the tenant administrator and the tenant users that manage or use L Platforms running on the hardware which is the target of maintenance regular maintenance or patch application that maintenance operations will be implemented As one method of notification Resource Orchestrator provides the function which shows the information by displaying Information on the ROR console for tenant administrators or tenant users For details refer to 3 2 Editing the Home Messages in the User s Guide for Infrastructu
107. S Server View FUJITSU ServerView Resource Orchestrator Cloud Edition V3 1 0 Operation Guide Windows Linux J2X1 7611 03ENZO 00 October 2012 Preface Resource Orchestrator Documentation Road Map The documentation road map for Resource Orchestrator is as shown below Resource Orchestrator Documentation Road Map Target Readers Design Pre Configuration Installation Quick Start Guide CE Design Guide CE Setup Guide CE Operation Guide CE User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE Users Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE Administrators Adi i LOS Reference Guide Command XML CE Infrastructure Administrators Reference Guide API Messages Troubleshooting NS Option Instruction DR Option Instruction Tenant Admins User s Guide for Tenant Administrators User s Guide Tenant Users for Tenant Users IE Point 6060606062000909000000009090900000009090909090000009009099090000009099099009000090909090900000009009090000000909900000009009090000099299 Refer to the user role manuals displayed in the table below for roles that are not in the diagram Roles that are not in the diagram Roles that are in the diagram Infrastructure operator Infrastructure administrator Infrastructure monitor Tenant operator Tenant administrator Tenant monitor Dual Role Administrator Infrastructure administrator and Tenant administrator Dual Role Operator
108. SCSI protocol over TCP IP networks iSCSI boot A configuration function that enables the starting and operation of servers via a network The OS and applications used to operate servers are stored on iSCSI storage not the internal disks of servers iSCSI storage Storage that uses an iSCSI connection LAG Link Aggregation Group A single logical port created from multiple physical ports using link aggregation 193 LAN switch blades A LAN switch that is mounted in the chassis of a blade server LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol A protocol used for accessing Internet standard directories operated using TCP IP LDAP provides functions such as direct searching and viewing of directory services using a web browser license The rights to use specific functions Users can use specific functions by purchasing a license for the function and registering it on the manager link aggregation Function used to multiplex multiple ports and use them as a single virtual port By using this function it becomes possible to use a band equal to the total of the bands of all the ports Also if one of the multiplexed ports fails its load can be divided among the other ports and the overall redundancy of ports improved local pool A resource pool that contains resources that can only be used by a specific tenant They are located in tenants logical volume A logical disk that has been divided into multiple partitions
109. SXi 5 0 to servers using the PXE boot mechanism Automatic Storage Layering A function that optimizes performance and cost by automatically rearranging data in storage units based on the frequency of access Auto Recovery A function which continues operations by automatically switching over the system image of a failed server to a spare server and restarting it in the event of server failure This function can be used when managed servers are in a local boot configuration SAN boot configuration or a configuration such as iSCSI boot where booting is performed from a disk on a network 188 When using a local boot configuration The system is recovered by restoring a backup of the system image of the failed server onto a spare server When booting from a SAN or a disk on a LAN The system is restored by having the spare server inherit the system image on the storage Also when a VLAN is set for the public LAN of a managed server the VLAN settings of adjacent LAN switches are automatically switched to those of the spare server backup site An environment prepared in a different location which is used for data recovery BACS Broadcom Advanced Control Suite An integrated GUI application comprised from applications such as BASP that creates teams from multiple NICs and provides functions such as load balancing Basic Mode A function that can be used by configuring a Cloud Edition license after installing ROR VE BASP Br
110. Shut down the server after completing BIOS settings 3 Re configure Hardware Properties after Replacement After replacing the server re configure Resource Orchestrator with the latest hardware properties For details on how to re configure hardware properties refer to 9 3 1 Reconfiguration of Hardware Properties 9 3 3 Replacing and Adding Server Components This section explains how to replace and add server components 58 Replacing and Adding Network Interfaces Admin LAN Public LAN The procedure used to replace and add network interfaces is the same as that described in 9 3 2 Replacing Servers For details refer to 9 3 2 Replacing Servers When adding or removing network interfaces if the target server is running Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 or Citrix XenServer after completing the steps described in 9 3 2 Replacing Servers log in with administrative privileges on the managed server and execute the following command usr local sbin macbindconfig create lt RETURN gt Xen When using Citrix XenServer reinstall XenServer referring to the Citrix XenServer manual When using Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Virtualization Xen Based and not using I O Virtualization VIOM perform the following procedure 1 Execute the following command to temporally disable automatic startup of the xend daemon and then restart the managed server chkconfig xend off lt RETURN gt 2 Once the server has restarted execute
111. When modifying the configuration information CPU core count CPU clock speed memory capacity etc of a server that has been registered with Resource Orchestrator in the definition file For details on re configuring hardware properties refer to 9 3 1 Reconfiguration of Hardware Properties 60 9 5 Network Device Maintenance This section explains how to maintain network devices that are the target of management in Resource Orchestrator 9 5 1 Replacement Procedure of Network Devices This section explains the procedure to replace network devices when it becomes necessary due to failure Figure 9 4 Image of Network Device Replacement Center Switch Center Switch Access Switch L2 Switch Access Switch L2 Switch Access Switch L2 Switch rver ad Balancer Access Switch L2 Switch Access Switch L2 Switch Access Switch L2 Switch Itis premised that you perform replacement while continuing operations using the network devices of redundancy configurations of active and standby switch structure When there is no description the operations are performed by an infrastructure administrator 9 5 1 1 When device that is targeted to replace is a breakdown This section explains replacement procedure when device that is targeted to replace is a breakdown When the Management Function for Network Device Configuration Files is not Used Announcement of planned maintenance operations z 615 2
112. XCFMG config lt param name File value C ProgramData vsys_log4j xml Fujitsu SystemwalkerCF MG logs vsys_audit_log gt Linux Manager Settings file Location to change one location vsys audit log letc opt FJS Vcfmg config param name File valuez var opt FJS V cfmg vsys log4j xml logs vsys audit log gt 2 Restart the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to Restart the manager Procedure for changing the size of the file Use the following procedure to change the audit log file size 1 Rewrite the settings file The location to change is shown below Windows Manager Settings file Location to change one location vsys_audit_log Installation_folde RCXCFMG config Change the underlined part of the lt param vsys_log4j xml name MaxFileSize value 10MB gt element under the lt appender name auditfileout class org apache log4j Rolling FileAppender gt element to the desired value Example value 100MB to change the size of the audit log file to 100 MB Linux Manager Settings file Location to change one location vsys audit log letc opt FJS Vcfmg config vsys log4j xml Change the underlined part of the param name MaxFileSize value 10MB gt element under the lt appender name auditfileout class org apache log4j Rollin gFileAppender element to the desired value 145 Settings file Location to change one location
113. Y Use the following strings to specify the day of the week MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN Commas can be used as delimiters to specify a number of days of the week If periodic log schedule type is MONTHLY Use one of the following methods to specify a date Numerics from 1 to 28 indicating the date LASTDAY string indicating the last day of the month 37 A number of days cannot be specified with this method Changes to this setting are enabled by executing the Change periodic log schedule settings command after changing the settings file 2 If periodic log schedule type is DAILY the periodic log schedule day value will be ignored An example of setting the operational settings file is shown below delete setting of meteringlog database YYYY MM DD ex 3 months ago 0000 03 00 retention period 0000 03 00 schedule of periodlog insert periodic log use yes periodic log schedule time 00 00 periodic log schedule type DAILY periodic log schedule day 3 If an item other than retention period has been changed execute the Change periodic log schedule settings command Refer to 10 1 ctchg chgschedule Change Periodic Log Schedule Settings in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on the Change periodic log schedule settings command Points to note when using the usage charge calculator Specify either the default value 3 months or a period longer than t
114. a rei e ee een iin e Tei d ed ere Fett ee Ladies 81 WET2Z2 Back up the Resources of this PIOdUL uii terrre rer AEri EA Oo eee t eed i ED DRE EO SOR 81 HEN EEAC ELI ICI Manaan RE 81 10 1 5 Ouhne Backup of die Aui Servat 1d en pete et e etie teet erit rtr Deere tento tia dier Er Ei ei ease Liga b be etudes 82 10 1 3 1 Items to be D terminod Before Periodic Hsia iet rette titer ecrire terere ce rie te e cetctes 84 10 1 3 2 Settings for Periodic Execution of Backup 10 14 Restarmg the Jd SETVE innere eite EE EEEREN ibd ese estoit ee d E Diener o dei eT rede toor e EIS SODBIUS TR BN ics caps ute era te mem qr este or DOTEM SENE QU QU DE Dra Oe FREE D epa En rn e Mere E 10 142 Restoring the Resources of This Product einer titt orte e EHE E I EE EO aie ERA JUNE X SC i LUGD T NM M EE 88 10 144 Disabling LePlattormi ApplicatiGns 2 2 2 2 nn rere tiet reb ree rt Eo EET E e OE ES Eee c EE Hidden 88 10 1 4 5 Updating the configuration information in the operational status information 88 10 55 Onabb Backup osungs Tor BASIC oo A oo tee erede ro e ette tro pe rte rere te en eria d ce EHE dried 10 2 Backup and Restoration of Network Devices 10 2 1 Miclianismn of Backup and Restori ON esns ep reste rer etre tr reti herr reti ee ERES ees ave isi 10 2 2 Backup of Wetw robur MMC 92 10 2 5 Restoratuom of Network Deviees 2 rene pere OEERIR EUER EE E a E EE ED EE E EP HERE 93 xad
115. ackup frequency Execute hourly difference backup Table 10 4 Formula for Metering Logs per Da Target capacity for metering logs Event Logs for an L Platform 2 3 KB each time A Event Logs for other than an L Platform 0 6 KB each time B Regular logs 2 3 number of L Platforms KB C Metering logs per day A operation number for L Platforms per day B operation number for other than L Platforms per day C number of operating L Platforms 2 3 KB 20 0 6 KB 2000 2 3 KB 1000 3 5 MB Table 10 5 Disk Space Necessary for Base Backup Log of the metering each day For one year 3 5 MB 365 1 3 GB Table 10 6 Disk Space Necessary for Difference Backu disk space per WAL file 16 MB WAL file space frequency until acquiring base backup 30 days 24 30 78 16 MB 24 30 11 3 GB Table 10 7 Disk Space Necessary for Operation of Online Backup Disk space necessary for operation of online backup Disk space necessary for base backup Disk space necessary for difference backup 1 3 GB 11 3 GB 12 6 GB Storage Destination for Backing Up Resources This section describes the storage destination for backing up Admin Server resources Use the rexmgrbackup command to specify a storage destination folder except in the case of metering information The folders described in the following table are automatically created in the storage destination folder in o
116. agement Console 3 Change the port number Select System gt Services gt Web Server gt RCXCT ext gt Web Server Settings to change the port number Changing the port number of L Platform management The procedure for changing the port number is as follows 1 Modify the portal properties file Open the following file Windows Manager Installation folderNRCXCTMGNSecurityManagementNconfNMportal properties Linux Manager etc opt FJSVctsec conf portal properties Change the port numbers specified in the following URL vsys host An example is shown below The parts in italics show the information that is changed vsys host http 192 168 11 22 8013 vsys services VSYS 24 2 Modify the managerview_config xml file Open the following file Windows Manager Installation folderNRCXCTMGMMyPortalNconfigNmanagerview config xml Linux Manager etc opt FJSVctmyp config managerview config xml Modify the value of the entry tag with vsys port as the key value The entry tag with vsys port as the key value An example is shown below The section in italics is the information to be modified entry key vsys port gt 8013 lt entry gt 8 4 Editing Information in the Home Window This section explains how to edit the information that is displayed on the lower part of the home window of the ROR Console The information can also be used to notify tenant administrators and tenant users of who to contact The
117. agement software to precisely locate faulty parts within a managed resource Monitoring is based on the following three components Resources Resource Orchestrator can centrally monitor the configuration and status of servers and other managed resources Chassis LAN switches LAN switch blades network devices physical OSs VM hosts and guests power monitoring devices etc directly from the ROR console When a hardware problem occurs on a server affected guest operating systems can be easily detected amp Note Power monitoring devices are not subject to monitoring 0606002000900000090990900009090900209000000099090909909000009090990080000090909090900000099090990990090000099099099099090000009209000000909299 Events Resource Orchestrator displays events such as hardware failures server switchovers triggered by hardware failures and the results of every performed operation Recent Operations Resource Orchestrator displays the progress status of the various operations performed on resources The following table shows the level of monitoring performed for each resource monitored in Resource Orchestrator Table 11 1 Monitoring Level for Each Resource T pe Resource Event Monitoring Yes Chassis Server Physical OS VM Hosts VM Guest VM management software LAN switch blade Network device Power monitoring device Yes Supported No Not supported Regular Update of Resource Data The Resource Orche
118. ains how to operate the accounting information The operation for the accounting information consists of registration modification deleting and reference Resister accounting information Register the accounting information when newly created L Platform templates are enabled The accounting information is set to the elements of L Platform templates that are created After finishing registration of the accounting information enable the L Platform templates It is also possible to register accounting information for L Servers that were imported into the system using the L Server import command Refer to 15 3 1 Register Accounting Information for information on how to register the accounting information Modify accounting information Modify the accounting information of the L Platform templates that are already enabled This corresponds to the case of setting limited time price for campaign or raising the price for example The price is modified to the accounting information of the L Platform templates registered on the product master It is also possible to modify accounting information for L Servers that were imported into the system Refer to 15 3 2 Modify Accounting Information Command for information on how to modify the accounting information Delete accounting information Delete the accounting information if the following conditions are met The L Platform templates are disabled The log that shows the usage result of the corr
119. aintenance and Monitoring by Infrastructure Administrators eese nennen entren 3 1 2 Operation Maintenance and Monitoring by Tenant Administrators eiie tete tener trennen et tb rbi eade eb bte fei Suid 4 1 3 Operation Maintenance and Monitoring by Tenant Users Lice rre tt tee Pent tht rr Pt t EO cete 4 DEZ DEOISIIBIE eet ec EAE MOeRHOI E EDDu eden en I LUE 5 Chapter 2 Starting and Stopping Managers and Agents sesssssssssssseseseee nennen nnne nnne enne nnne tenente 6 2 1 Startins mid Stoppt T MI ABEDSI 2 nr rco o En een hi Cet tbe sada SIR Eee do E da Ee TEE Meech EAEE 6 SG SUDE SU SUD DD GOIN sous dro e e d ee dece bentur dS candy oim A feda bind 8 Chapter 3 Managing User Accounts sessssssseseseseeseeeee enne nennen tenen rese tnnei rerit sentes et nn entr s ennt sets nenne etnies eterna 11 Ghapier 4 Managng TET ARES erinan arenai aE OLEO Um 12 acad Managing TEMES E 13 Chapter 6 Managing Resources and Resource PoOols cesccecscceeseeesececeseeeeaeeseaeeeeaeeseaeeceacessaeeseaeesesaeeeaeesesaeeeaeeseeeseeeetags 14 o1 Muuisine PERCU ES Pools aae er tet ren ere ee o ir e s rri a Ee d er ee S RE d ters 14 meh ru nrauradii rire M 14 E qttam Seir T 14 Chapter 7 Management of P SEMEN iai osea cic car
120. am is as follows 1 A problem occurs in the system Example Occurs at 12 35 on August 1 2011 2 In order to restore the system restoration is performed on the environment backed up offline and the environment backed up online Example Restores at 14 00 on August 1 2011 Refer to Points to Note at Backup and Restoration for information on the restoration order 3 The latest differential backup files are dated 12 00 on August 1 2011 so the restart point will be from that date and time 10 1 2 Offline Backup of the Admin Server Before performing backup the systems of this product must be stopped 1 Stop the Manager 2 Back up the Resources of this Product 3 Start the Manager 80 10 1 2 1 Stopping the Manager Stop the Manager and check that it is in a stopped state Stopping the Manager Execute the command shown below to stop the Manager For details on the command refer to 5 19 rcxmgrctl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Windows Manager gt Installation_folder SVROR Manager bin rexmgrctl stop RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrcvmr bin rcxmgrctl stop RETURN Checking the status of the services of this product Check that the Manager and services of this product are stopped For details on how to check refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager 10 1 2 2 Back up the Resources of this Product Back up the resources of this product Execute the command shown below For details on t
121. am name File value C ProgramData batch_log4j xml Fujitsu SystemwalkerCF MG logs Wsys batch log gt myportal trace log Installation foldeNRCXCTMG param name file value C Fujitsu ROR MyPortal config RCXCTMG MyPortal log myportal trace log gt managerview_log4j xml cfmg_api_log Installation_folde RCXCFMG config param name file value C ProgramData api_log4j xml Fujitsu SystemwalkerCF MG logs cfmg_api_log gt 156 Linux Manager Settings file Location to change one location vsys trace log letc opt FJS Vcfmg config param name File valuez var opt FJS V cfmg vsys log4j xml logs vsys trace log gt vsys batch log etc opt FJS Vcfmg config param name File value var opt FJS V cfmg batch log4j xml logs vsys batch log gt myportal trace log etc opt FJS Vctmyp config param name file value var opt managerview_log4j xml FJSVctmyp log myportal_trace log gt cfmg_api_log etc opt FJSVcfmg config lt param name File value var opt FJS Vcfmg api_log4j xml logs cfmg_api_log gt 2 Restart the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to Restart the manager 157 Part 5 High Availability and Disaster Recovery Chapter 17 High Availability of Managed Resources Chapter 18 Disaster Recovery 158 Chapter 17 High Availability of Managed Resources This chapter explains failover 17 1 High Availability of Managed Re
122. ame Process instance name L PlatformSubscription xxx L PlatformChange xxx L PlatformUnsubscription xxx State of process instance State of process instance closed Closed Process instance end time Time that the process instance ended yyyy mm dd hh mm ss sss 153 Activity name Activity name Application Approve Assess Pending state Cancel Task execution date time The date time the task was executed Person responsible User ID of the user that executed the task Status Shows the state of task COMPLETED Completed Task process Button name executed by the activity Application Apply Approve 0 Approve or 1 Reject Assess O0 Accept or 1 Dismiss Pending state 0 Cancel Cancel 0 Cancel Result of application Result of application Accepted When Accept is executed for an assessment task Approved When Approve is executed for an approval task when ApproverOnly Rejected When Reject is executed for an approval task Dismissed When Dismiss is executed for an assessment task Canceled When Cancel is executed for a cancellation task Canceled When Cancel is executed for a pending task Output example The example below shows the output of the audit information for the process instance with the name L Platform usage application 100 2012 04 11 17 03 53 580 tenant user001 L PlatformSubscription 100 closed 2012 04 11 17 04 25 471 Application 2012 04 11 17 03 56 111 tenant user001 COMPLETED
123. are Details Confirm the following information displayed in the Main Panel Basic Information Device Status The status of the firewall is displayed When the status is something other than normal it indicates that an error might have occurred Port Information Link Status The port status of the firewall is displayed When the status is something other than up that is not intended by infrastructure administrator it indicates that a port error might have occurred Additionally confirm status system condition and operation status and whether communication packet can pass or not by logging the firewall directly and check the error detected by the firewall 4 Confirm the status of the firewall When passing of communication packets is rejected by a firewall or an event log is output The infrastructure administrator must confirm if the following items using auto configuration are correct Scripts for configurations Parameter files Configuration files for interfaces When it is possible that the hardware has failed in cases where the firewall device status is unknown or the link status is down that is not intended by infrastructure administrator The infrastructure administrator must request confirmation the status from the administrator of the network device in cases where firewall hardware has not failed The network device administrator should request a hardware maintenance person to take corrective action when har
124. are server When specifying the model name on creation of a physical L Server If the model name is the same or compatible Number of NICs If CPUs and memories are specified when specifying a physical L Server CPU core count CPU clock speed Memory capacity Number of NICs Configurations are not checked A server that satisfies or exceeds all conditions and has the nearest specifications to the L Server definition is selected When the Use a low spec server checkbox is selected physical servers with models matching that in the L Server definition are selected as spare servers For details refer to B 9 Methods for Selecting Physical Servers Automatically in the Setup Guide CE Modification of Checks on Spare Server Models and Configurations The switchover policy and the definition of server model compatibility can be modified Although the definition file is deployed when installing managers a server model with a matching L Server definition and physical server model is selected as a spare server in the following cases When there is no definition file When there is an error in definitions When the Use a low spec server checkbox is selected physical servers with models matching that in the L Server definition are selected as spare servers The definition file for checks on spare server models and configurations is stored in the following location Location of the Definition File Windows Manager Instal
125. assessor at the directory server Follow the procedure below to register as application process assessor 1 Create an infrastructure administrator or dual role administrator 2 Add the infrastructure administrator or dual role administrator as a member of the IflowUsers group G amp Note Infrastructure administrators and dual role administrators who have not been registered in the IflowUsers group cannot conduct assessment in application processes Also if infrastructure administrators and dual role administrators not registered in the IflowUsers group select the Request tab in the ROR Console the following error message appears Error message Failed to authenticate the user Administrators dual role administrators created during installation are not registered in the IflowUsers group Add them to the IflowUsers group f an email address is not set assessment request emails are not sent and reservation notification emails are not sent when an error occurs If no infrastructure administrators or dual role administrators are registered in the IflowUsers group the following message is displayed after the application is forwarded from the Forward screen window when the user subscribes to the service PCS1002 An error occurred while processing application Please contact the infrastructure administrators Refer to 19 2 1 Registering an Application Process Assessor in the Setup Guide CE for information on
126. assis physical servers LAN switches physical OS s VM hosts or VM guests If Auto Recovery has been enabled for a physical OS or VM host it will be automatically switched over with a spare server If Auto Recovery has not been enabled server switchover can still be performed manually as long as a spare server has been designated For server switchover refer to 4 2 Switchover in the Operation Guide VE 4 Perform Detailed Investigation and Recovery From the Resource Details tab of the failed resource launch the external management software to investigate the precise cause of the problem When no management software is available confirm with the maintenance staff of the failed resource to investigate the problem Once this is done perform the necessary maintenance work on any faulty hardware identified If aserver hardware failure requires replacing a managed server carry out the replacement operation as described in 9 3 2 Replacing Servers 5 Perform Post recovery Verification Following recovery confirm that there are no more icons indicating problems on the ROR console 11 4 Monitoring Networks This section explains detecting status change of network devices to automatic network settings for them Besides network monitoring of this product operates monitoring existence and state and SNMP trap monitoring of network devices For error monitoring such as port trouble of network device please use network management software
127. assis High Availability Design in the Design Guide CE Replication of Storage Unit LUNs For ETERNUS Define the LUN replication using ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager For EMC CLARiiON Define the LUN replication using the MirrorView function For EMC Symmetrix DMX storage and EMC Symmetrix VMAX storage Define the device replication using the SRDF function 164 Replication Definition Files The replication definition file must be created in advance In the replication definition file describe the relationship between the operating storage and the standby storage for replication The format of the replication definition file is as follows IP address of operating storage unit Operating volume identifier IP address of standby storage unit Standby volume identifier Configure the definition file using a unique combination of an IP address for an operating or standby storage unit and an identifier for an operating or standby volume When the information overlaps in the replication definition file an error will occur when creating a failover or a failback script For ETERNUS The relationship for replication can be checked using ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager Specify the IP address of a storage for the storage identifier Check the IP address of a storage using the rcxadm storage list command For details on volume identifiers check them from ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager Volume identifiers are written in hexadec
128. ating and a standby storage unit are displayed in the storage tree The script can be created as long as the operating storage unit is displayed in the storage tree even if it has failed Gj Note These scripts cannot be created when the operation target storage unit is not displayed in the storage tree 3 Execute the physical L Server stopping script on the server where the manager is being operated This operation stops the physical L Server targeted by the failover script To forcibly stop the server without shutting down the operating system running on the L Server specify the force option when executing the physical L Server stopping script If an error occurs during execution of the script contact Fujitsu technical staff amp Note Physical L Servers are stopped in the order of the entries in the physical L Server stopping script When specification of the order of stopping physical L Servers is necessary edit the physical L Server stopping script 4 Delete the zoning combining the WWPN of the HBA of the physical L Server and the WWPN of the port of the operating storage from the Fibre Channel switch For ETERNUS storage this step is not necessary as the zoning for Fibre Channel switch will be deleted by Resource Orchestrator when the failover script is executed 5 If the replication function for storage is in operation stop it 166 10 Execute the failover script on the server where the manager is being operated I
129. b of the Main Panel e Confirm Network Resource of Network Information When the network device name is the same as the name confirmed in a the error on the network device L2 switch can be identified on the specified network device that was confirmed in a Additionally confirm the status of the specified L2 switch For details on how to confirm the L2 switch status refer to 11 4 4 L2 Switch Status Confirmation When there is no network device on which changing state has occurred one of the following errors may have occurred The wrong access control rules have been applied to the firewall and passing of communication packet data is being rejected Use the following procedure to confirm the status of the firewall a Identify the firewall used for the notified L Platform For details on how to specify the firewall refer to When the network device on which changing state has occurred is a firewall or a server load balancer b Confirm the status of the firewall For details on how to confirm the status of the firewall refer to 11 4 2 Firewall Status Confirmation An error occurred in a network device that is managed using Resource Orchestrator Request investigation from the network device administrator from the following point of view If an error has occurred on a network device connecting to the network device used for the L Platform If an error has occurred on a network device on the communication route to the L Platfo
130. bal pool that can be used by tenants perform the operation from the Tenant tab on the ROR console For details on the Tenant tab refer to Chapter 11 Tenant in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE 6 2 Managing Resources This section explains the management of resources Use the Resource tab in the ROR console to register change or delete resources Register Resources Refer to Chapter 5 Registering Resources in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE Change Resources Refer to Chapter 7 Changing Resources in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE Delete Resources Refer to Chapter 9 Deleting Resources in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE For details on how to add network devices refer to 9 5 3 Procedure for Addition of Network Devices and for details on how to add or modify connection destinations of network devices refer to 9 5 4 Procedure for Addition or Modification of Connection Destinations of Network Devices 6 3 Managing L Servers This section explains the management of L Servers L Server Operations Refer to Chapter 17 L Server Operations in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE Use of Physical Servers or Virtual Machines as L Servers Configured physical servers or virtual machines can be used as L Servers For details
131. balancer device status is unknown or the link status is down that is not intended by infrastructure administrator The infrastructure administrator should request confirmation of the status from the administrator of the network device to check if the server load balancer has failed The network device administrator should request a hardware maintenance person to take corrective action when hardware has failed 5 Take corrective action based on the results of checked scripts and files When there are no errors in the scripts or files checked in 4 Request confirmation from a tenant administrator or tenant user that there are no errors in the parameters taken over during the L Platform update When there are errors in the scripts or files checked in 4 The infrastructure administrator should log in to the server load balancer directly delete the failed configuration such as load balancing rules and modify any scripts or files containing errors 6 Take corrective action based on the results of parameter checks When there are no errors in the parameters taken over during the L Platform update Confirm with the administrator of the network device that the server load balancer configuration has not been modified since an unexpected modification may have been made to the definition When there are errors in the parameters taken over during the L Platform update The infrastructure administrator should log in to the server load ba
132. based on the operation policy WS See For details on L2 switch operations login status confirmation definition extraction definition modification refer to the manuals of L2 switches 606060620606200090920909000009290990909090000909099090900000900909929090000009090909909090900090909099090000009090909909000000909909000000009990900000909299 11 4 5 Status Confirmation of Other Network Devices This section explains the confirmation procedure for other network devices Use the following procedure to check the statuses of other network devices 1 Log in to the network device directly 2 Confirm the status using the network device functions See For details on the operations such as login and status confirmation on the network devices refer to the manuals of network devices 11 5 Monitoring Storage This section explains how to monitor storage The following is possible when monitoring storage Display of virtual storage resource and disk resource information Monitoring of storage unit errors Use of storage management software to monitor storage For ETERNUS storage Refer to the ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser User s Guide and the ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Message Guide For EMC CLARiiON storage Refer to the EMC Navisphere Manager Administrator s Guide For EMC Symmetrix DMX storage and EMC Symmetrix VMAX storage Refer to the EMC Navisphere Manager Administrator s Guide 107 For NetApp storage Re
133. ble when the destination cannot be found while performing the switchover even if the check has been made in advance Define compatible server models as a group When checking the L Server definition and the spare server SPARE_SVR_COMP configuration the server models in the same group are the Compatibility of ATX modelA target of switchover Server Model Xis a number from 0 modelB 255 Examples of server models are as below BX920 S1 BX920 S2 Note The value of SPARE SVR COMPAT is changeable Server switchover may fail depending on the combination of changed values such as when a server with no compatibility is set as a spare server Example Definition File Spare server check configuration Spare server check logic s policy skip warning 161 error OVERALL POLICY skip Server model compatibility list SPARE SVR COMPATO BX920 S1 BX920 S2 17 1 2 Blade Chassis High Availability This section explains high availability for when operating L Servers on blade servers When the server is a physical L Server for a blade server this function which enables restarting of L Servers by manually switching over servers to spare servers when there are blade servers are specified as spare servers on other chassis Prerequisites For details on prerequisites for high availability of blade chassis refer to 7 1 Blade Chassis High Availability Design in the Design Guide CE Instal
134. can view the confirmed usage charges If necessary the usage charge information can also be downloaded as a file 15 2 Manage Accounting Information This section explains how to manage the accounting information The accounting information is managed in the product master The accounting information of product master is managed using the product master maintenance command The product master maintenance command provides the following functions Register the accounting information of an L Platform template on the product master Output the accounting information of an L Platform template that is registered on the product master to the accounting information file Refer to 10 4 productmaintain Product Master Maintenance in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on the product master maintenance command m Information Usage fee the estimated price of L Platform templates will be displayed when the following operations are performed by registering the accounting information L Platform subscription from the L Platform management window Modifying L Platform templates Approving application list from the ROR Console Assessment from the ROR Console 00060600009209909000009099290990900000909099090900000909009909909000009090999909000000909099000000000992909000000909999000000099099099090000099299 114 G Note Usage fee the estimated price for the L Platform template will be displayed provided that setting
135. cation flow for deploying an L Platform or changing a configuration VSYS flowForward Applying to deploy an L Platform or change a configuration 143 VSYS flowRejectA pplication VSYS flowRelease VSYS flowReleaseA pplication VSYS flowReleaseForward VSYS flowSaveCancel VSYS flowUpdate VSYS getConfigurations VSYS getCurrency VSYS getDetail VSYS getHostnameCounter VSYS getList VSYS getLoginDate VSYS getOperationLNetDevResult VSYS getPoolList VSYS getTask VSYS getTenantList VSYS importLServer VSYS lock VSYS operateLNetDev VSYS recoverDisk VSYS recoverNet VSYS recoverNic VSYS recoverServer VSYS recoverSystem VSYS release VSYS resetHostnameCounter VSYS setChangelInfo VSYS setDisplayStatus VSYS setLoginDate VSYS setRecoverInfo VSYS setServerStatus VSYS setUndeploy VSYS start VSYS startServers VSYS stop VSYS stopServers VSYS syncServerStatus VSYS syncSpec VSYS unlock 144 VSYS update Reconfiguring an L Platform VSYS updateLNetDev Updating the parameters for the firewall and server load balancer VSYS updateRemarks Changing the L Platform remarks column input values after deploying Procedure for changing output destination Use the following procedure to change the audit log output destination 1 Rewrite the settings file The following table shows the settings file and the location to change Windows Manager Settings file Location to change one location vsys_audit_log Installation_folde RC
136. ccounting etc opt FJS Vctmg conf auditsecalog4j xml Windows Manager Installation foldeNRCX CTMGconf auditsecslog4j xml Linux Manager letc opt FJS Vctmg conf auditsecslog4j xml Windows Manager Installation foldeNRCX CTMQGNconf auditchglog4j xml Linux Manager letc opt FJS Vctmg conf auditchglog4j xml 148 Accounting GUI operations from the ROR Console Accounting Published API operation Access Control System condition Setting items MaxFileSize Definition file Windows Manager Installation folde RCXCTMG conf auditchgguilog4j xml Linux Manager letc opt FJS Vctmg conf auditchgguilog4j xml Windows Manager Installation folde RCXCTMG conf auditacntlog4j xml Linux Manager etc opt FJS Vctmg conf auditacntlog4j xml Windows Manager Installation foldeNRCX CTMGconfauditaclog4j xml Linux Manager letc opt FJS Vctmg conf auditaclog4j xml Windows Manager Installation_folde SWRBAM CMDB FJS Vcmdbm CMDBConsole WEB INF classes log4j properties Linux Manager opt FJS Vcmdbm CMDBConsole WEB INF classes log4j properties This item sets the maximum size of audit log files The file size can be specified using a combination of an integer greater than 0 and a unit KB MB or GB 1 2 Example param name MaxFileSize value 500KB gt MaxBackupIndex This item sets the maximum number of generations of the audit log file An integer greater than 0 can be s
137. ce Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE 6 Notify Users of Maintenance Operation Completion The infrastructure administrator notifies tenant administrators and tenant users that manage or use L Platforms running on the hardware which was the target of maintenance that maintenance operations have been completed As one method of notification Resource Orchestrator provides the function which shows the information by displaying Information on the ROR console for tenant administrators or tenant users For details refer to 3 2 Editing the Home Messages in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE 44 Flow of Corrective Actions when Hardware Fails The flow of corrective actions when hardware fails is as below Figure 9 2 Flow of Corrective Actions when Hardware on which an L Platform Operates Fails m Dmm Caen Error Detection Error Detection Investigation Investigation Request Request Status Confirmation Problem Cause Investigation Corrective Action Reporting of Reporting of Investigation Results Investigation Results 1 Error Detection Errors are detected at the following timing When operation errors are reported to the tenant user by the user of the application running on the L Platform When hardware errors are detected by the infrastructure administrator or the infrastructure monitor When the status of L Platform resourc
138. cheduler 84 2 To manage tasks hierarchically use the following procedure to create a folder a Inthe Task Scheduler menu after selecting Task Scheduler Library select Actions New Folder and then enter any folder name in the dialog box that is displayed and click OK b Selecting the created folder and then creating another folder by selecting Actions New Folder from the Task Scheduler menu allows a further hierarchical level to be added Point 0606060600200000909090909000000000090909090906090000000090909090900900090000000009009909909090000000009009090909090000000000090999 Creating a folder in Task Manager allows tasks to be managed hierarchically In cases such as where multiple tasks are to be registered creating a folder allows task management to be performed efficiently 3 From the Task Scheduler menu select Actions gt gt Create Basic Task to display the Create Basic Task Wizard Point 0606060606200600029299000000000090909099099590909000000090090092090909000000000090909909909099090000000009099099909000060060090629299 When a subsequent operation is performed after any folder is selected the task will be registered under that folder If a folder is not selected the task will be registered in the Task Scheduler Library 4 In the Name field enter a task name for example Monthly backup and click Next 5 Select Monthly as the task trigger and click Next 6 In the Start field set
139. cing Non server Hardware 9 2 Blade Server Maintenance This section explains the maintenance of blade servers 9 2 1 Maintenance LED This section explains how to operate maintenance LEDs Activating a server blade s maintenance LED make it easy to identify a server from others When replacing servers it is recommended to use this function to identify which server blade should be replaced To activate the maintenance LED of a managed server running either a physical OS or a VM host the server should be placed into maintenance mode first For details on maintenance mode refer to Appendix C Maintenance Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE amp Note 606060600900909009000000060909040000009090909090000090090990090900000909090900600000909090000000090909090000000090909090000000920000000902996 Maintenance LED control is only available for PRIMERGY BX servers The actual LED used as an identification LED differs between server models For PRIMERGY BX600 servers the power LED is used blinks when activated For PRIMERGY BX900 servers the ID indicator is used lit when activated If SNMP agent settings within the management blade configuration are incorrect maintenance LED operations in Resource Orchestrator will end successfully but the state of the identification LED will not change Configure the settings correctly referring to 8 2 Configuring the Server Environment in the
140. cked up in 3 and those backed up in 6 When the management function for network device configuration files is used Export the configuration file using the rcxadm netdevice cfexport command and check for any differences When there is difference that is a problem log in to the network device with standby status and resolve the difference When the management function for network device configuration files is not used When the management function for network device configuration files is not used When there is difference that is a problem log in to the network device with standby status and resolve the difference For information about how to export refer to the network device manuals For information about login to network devices refer to the network device manuals 65 8 Release the network device from maintenance mode after checking that problems with network devices with standby status have been solved 9 Switch over the network device in active status that is the target of regular maintenance and the network device of the redundancy configuration which is in standby status 10 Then change the status of the remaining network device that is the target of regular maintenance from operational status to standby status and perform steps 3 to 8 11 Announce that maintenance operations are complete See For details on how to configure and release the maintenance mode refer to 22 1 Switchover of Maintenance Mode
141. ckup RETURN chown R rcxctdbdhg rcxctdbchg walbackup RETURN 3 Copy move files from the existing directory to the new directory Windows Manager gt xcopy c Fujitsu ROR RCXCTMG backup data D basebackup E H K X RETURN gt xcopy c Fujitsu ROR RCXCTMG backup wal E walbackup E H K X RETURN Linux Manager cp pR var opt FJSVctchg backup data basebackup RETURN cp pR var opt FJSVctchg backup wal walbackup RETURN 4 Modify the operational settings file for the database Change the settings for the following operational settings file for each database cluster Windows Manager Installation_folder RCXCTMG Charging pgsql data postgresql conf Change as follows Setting before Change archive command copy Sp C Fujitsu ROR RCXCTMG backup wal Charging f command to use to archive a logfile segment Setting after Change archive command copy p E walbackup Charging f command to use to archive a logfile segment Point Use as a delimiter 6066060600000000000909000000000090909909900090000000090909099090090000000000009009090900000000000999909090060000999 Linux Manager var opt FJSVctchg pgsql data postgresql conf Setting before Change archive command cp Sp var opt FJSVctchg backup wal f command to use to archive a logfile segment Setting after Change archive command copy
142. console 06060060000900990000009090900000090990090000009090929099009000000909092800000900000000000990900909000009990905200000009090900000009299 137 16 1 2 Usage Method This section explains the methods for configuring and operating operation logs Perform the following procedure 1 Disk space estimation Infrastructure administrator infra admin estimates the disk size to use for storing operation logs Estimate the amount of disk space using the following formula and then decide the number of days to retain operation logs GNumber of operations of the resource in 1 day Number of target resources 1 KB retention period a Example Disk space when estimating that the retention period is 180 days by default the target resource is operated 4 times and the number of target resources is 256 Retention Necessary Disk Formula period Space 180 days worth Approx 185 MB 4 256 1 180 184320 KB 00606060060600209209090909099909000000909090990999092099000609000900900920909909000000000090099909990990900006000000992909900000600000929292299 2 Check the settings in the Date and Time properties dialog of the operating system Check whether the following tabs of the OS are configured correctly If the settings are incorrect set them correctly Date and Time tab Time Zone tab Internet Time or the Network Time Protocol tab 3 Configure the retention period of operation logs Execute t
143. ction of the product master maintenance command Refer to 15 2 2 Accounting Information File Format for information on the accounting information file format 15 4 Calculation of Usage charges This section explains how to calculate usage charges wA See Refer to Appendix B Metering Log for information on the metering log which is the information upon which the calculation of usage charges is based 606060662020002000000009090000000909099090900000909099090900000909909900000090909090000009000999099000000909990000009009090900000909299 126 15 4 1 Overview of Usage charge Calculation When a user subscribes to or unsubscribes from an L Platform or performs operations such as starting or stopping an L Server these are recorded as operation logs in the metering log Resource L Platform L Server etc usage time is then aggregated from this operation log Usage charges are calculated for each L Platform based on the aggregated usage time the amount of resources used and the unit price in the charge information The monthly usage charges are confirmed the day after the cut off date set for the tenants and then sent to the email address 15 4 2 Resource Usage Times Resource usage times include the time deployed and the time operated These are aggregated based on the information in the metering log Deployment time is the time between when the resource is deployed and when it is terminated Operating time is the time between
144. d by creating a logical definition of a server called a server profile and assigning it to a server Virtual Edition The edition that can use the server switchover function Virtual I O Technology that virtualizes the relationship of servers and I O devices mainly storage and network thereby simplifying the allocation of and modifications to I O resources to servers and server maintenance For Resource Orchestrator it is used to indicate HBA address rename and ServerView Virtual IO Manager VIOM virtual server A virtual server that is operated on a VM host using a virtual machine virtual storage resource This refers to a resource that can dynamically create a disk resource An example being RAID groups or logical storage that is managed by server virtualization software such as VMware datastores In Resource Orchestrator disk resources can be dynamically created from ETERNUS RAID groups NetApp aggregates and logical storage managed by server virtualization software virtual switch A function provided by server virtualization software to manage networks of VM guests as virtual LAN switches The relationships between the virtual NICs of VM guests and the NICs of the physical servers used to operate VM hosts can be managed using operations similar to those of the wiring of normal LAN switches A function provided by server virtualization software in order to manage L Server VM networks as virtual LAN switches Management
145. d corresponding template information XML tag Specify VM pool name sever pool name and storage pool name in the format that start with slash If the VM pool name sever pool name or storage pool name are omitted they are output to the template information as pool gt or lt storagePool gt respectively In this case refer to the resource pool and perform settings on the ROR Console Resource tab Refer to the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE for information on the ROR Console Resource tab 3 The currency used is determined by the currency information setting Refer to 8 7 2 Currency Information Settings for information on the currency information setting An example description of template information and corresponding accounting information is shown below Example of template information lt xml version 1 0 encoding Windows 31J lt templates gt lt template gt id templateIdl id servers server lt pool gt VMHostPool lt pool gt lt storagePool gt StoragePool lt storagePool gt lt image gt lt imageName gt imagel lt imageName gt lt image gt lt server gt lt servers gt lt template gt lt templates gt 120 Example description of accounting information file TP 0001 0 2012 01 01T00 00 00 000 0900 template templateId1 month 1000 Web DB Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Service Windows Server 200
146. d servers are stopped in order to perform maintenance work In this state the backup and restoration of system images and the collection and deployment of cloning images can be performed However when using Auto Recovery it is necessary to change from this mode to active mode When in maintenance mode it is not possible to switch over to a spare server if a server fails managed server A collective term referring to a server that is managed as a component of a system management blade A server management unit that has a dedicated CPU and LAN interface and manages blade servers Used for gathering server blade data failure notification power control etc Management Board The PRIMEQUEST system management unit Used for gathering information such as failure notification power control etc from chassis manager The section program of Resource Orchestrator that operates on admin servers It manages and controls resources registered with Resource Orchestrator master configuration file This is the original network device configuration file that is backed up from each network device immediately after Resource Orchestrator is set up It is used for the following purposes When initializing the settings of network devices When checking the differences between the current and original configurations For providing the initial settings when creating a new system with the same configuration In regards to the network device file
147. dows Control Panel open Administrative Tools Then open the Services window to stop or start the following service Deployment Agent Systemwalker SQC DCM Linux VMware Xen KVM The agent consists of the following services Agent Service Related Services Deployment Agent For VMware vSphere 4 0 or later version Deployment Agent is not automatically started as backup and restore and cloning functions cannot be used It is not necessary to start up Linux Systemwalker SQC DCM Execute the following commands to determine whether the agent is running or not If those commands show that the processes for the agent and deployment services are running then the agent can be asserted to be running Agent Service bin ps ef grep FJSVssagt lt RETURN gt Related Services bin ps ef grep scwagent lt RETURN gt To check the running state of the service of Systemwalker SQC DCM execute the following command etc rc0 d K00ssqcdcm RETURN The following explains how to start and stop each service Agent Service Agents can be started and stopped using the start and stop subcommands of the rcxadm agtctl command For details of the command refer to 5 3 rcxadm agtctl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Related Services Execute the following command to start or stop the collection of image files deployment of image files and server startup control Starting an L Server letc
148. dware has failed 102 J 6 7 Take corrective action based on the results of checked scripts and files When there are no errors in the scripts or files checked in 4 Request confirmation from a tenant administrator or tenant user that there are no errors in the parameters taken over during the L Platform update When there are errors in the scripts or files checked in 4 The infrastructure administrator will log in to the firewall directly delete the failed configuration such as rejection of communication packets and modify error scripts or files Take corrective action based on the results of parameter checks When there are no errors in the parameters taken over during the L Platform update Confirm with the administrator of the network device that the firewall configuration has not been modified since an unexpected definition modification may have been made When there are errors in the parameters taken over during the L Platform update The infrastructure administrator will log in to the firewall directly and delete the failed configuration such as rejection of communication packets Take corrective action based on the check results if definitions have been modified When the network device administrator has not modified the configuration Extract the firewall definitions and check the content When inappropriate settings have been configured log in to the firewall directly and modify the definitions
149. e When registering an agent and performing backups of system images or cloning images perform one of the following Restart the managed server after reconfiguring the hardware properties Restart the related services described in 2 2 Starting and Stopping an Agent 9 2 3 Replacing Servers This section details the procedure to follow when replacing servers m Information Follow the same procedure when replacing servers where VM hosts are running No specific action is required in Resource Orchestrator when replacing admin servers or HBA address rename setup service servers 060606002009090000000090909069000000909099090690000090909490990990000009090906090900000090900090000009090900000000090909090000000909090000009999 Replacing a Server Assigned with Spare Servers Use the following procedure to switch applications over to a spare server and replace a server with minimal interruption Perform Server Switchover Switch over the server to replace with its spare server For server switchover refer to Chapter 4 Server Switchover in the Operation Guide VE After the server has been switched over its maintenance LED is automatically activated and the server is powered down 2 Replace the Server Replace the server whose maintenance LED is activated Change the BIOS settings of the replacement server to match the operating environment For details on BIOS settings refer to 8 2 Configure the Server Environment in the
150. e This section explains how to replace hardware external to servers Replacing Chassis No specific action is required in Resource Orchestrator Replacing Management Blades No specific action is required in Resource Orchestrator Replacing LAN Switch Blades No specific action is required for PRIMERGY BX900 BX400 LAN switch blades in IBP mode For other LAN switch blades of PRIMERGY BX models after replacing a switch blade update the new LAN switch blade with the VLAN settings that were previously configured in Resource Orchestrator Use the following procedure to replace a LAN switch blade 1 Replace the faulty LAN switch blade 2 Restore the LAN switch blade configuration backup which includes all of the LAN switch blade settings to the new LAN switch blade If the LAN switch blade configuration was not been backed up in advance it has to be restored by configuring each setting except VLAN settings to the same values set during the initial installation Refer to the manual of the LAN switch blade used for details on how to back up and restore LAN switch blade configurations 3 Update the new LAN switch blade with the latest VLAN settings configured in Resource Orchestrator a In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target LAN switch and select Restore from the popup menu The Restore LAN Switch dialog is displayed b Click OK VLAN settings are applied to the specified LAN switch blade amp
151. e run the installation program again SAN Boot The replaced server can be easily configured to access the original boot disk using I O virtualization Therefore there is no need to restore the boot disk Simply power on the replacement server 7 Release Maintenance Mode Release the replaced server from maintenance mode For details on maintenance mode refer to Appendix C Maintenance Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE Servers with no Agent Registered Use the following procedure to replace servers on which no Resource Orchestrator agent was registered 1 Power OFF Shut down the server to replace if it is still powered on For details on shutting down servers refer to Chapter 14 Power Control in the User s Guide VE 2 Replace the Server Replace the target server Change the BIOS settings of the replacement server to match the operating environment For details on BIOS settings refer to 8 2 Configure the Server Environment in the Design Guide CE Shut down the server after completing BIOS settings Configure the remote management controller of the replacement server with the same IP address user name password and SNMP trap destination as those set on the original server 3 Re configure Hardware Properties after Replacement After replacing the server re configure Resource Orchestrator with the latest hardware properties For details on how to re configure ha
152. e cfrestore command is not required By function of Cisco ASA 5500 series same configuration as device of active state is reflected automatically For detail please refer to manual of Cisco ASA 5500 series For restoration of network device file please refer to 10 2 3 Restoration of Network Devices For maintenance procedure of network device please refer to manual of network device Back up the current network device files from the network devices with operational status If the content of the backed up device configuration file is up to date this step is not required If the content is not the up to date take a backup of the network device configuration file using the rexadm netdevice cfbackup command The date and time of backup can be checked using the rcxadm netdevice cflist command Check that there are no differences in the definitions that become a problem in the redundancy configurations using the network device files used in 4 and the network device configuration file in the network device file backed up in 5 Export each network device configuration file with rexadm netdevice cfexport command and check the difference When there is difference that becomes a problem please resolve difference following maintenance procedure of network devices For maintenance procedure of network device please refer to manual of network devices Release the maintenance mode of network devices when problems with network devices after
153. e following normal or unknown If unknown is shown check whether the VM management software is operating properly VM host The status of a VM host is displayed in the same way as for a physical OS VM guest Errors detected from server virtualization software are reflected in VM guest statuses VM guest statuses can be one of the following normal warning error unknown or stop For details refer to D 3 Functional Differences between Products in the Design Guide VE For LAN switches error and fatal are not displayed Only warning normal or unknown are displayed 98 11 3 Addressing Resource Failures This section explains how to address problems like hardware failures that occur in a system Basic Procedure The following procedure is used to confirm and resolve problems using the ROR console 1 Confirm the Existence of a Problem For the confirmation method refer to 11 2 Resource Status and A 3 Status Panel in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE 2 Check the Event Log Use the event log to check the device where the error occurred and the content of the event In some cases a single problem can cause a series of events so search back through past events to find events with dates that are close together 3 Check the Status of Resources From the resource tree open the resource where the problem occurred and look for any affected ch
154. e global pools have been set the global pools are output separated by commas An example is shown below amp globalpool AddressPool ImagePool 3 For the operation result of createOrg deleteOrg or updateOrg the processing result will be output Use the operation log resource operation to check the actual processing result Refer to 16 1 Operation Logs for information on how to check the operation log resource operation 4 Multiple lines may be output each time there is a registration operation 5 Format is yyyy MM dd 6 Format is yyyy MM ddTHH mm ss SSSZ 7 Audit logs for usage condition are output only when operations are performed from the ROR Console 16 2 3 Application Process Audit Log This section explains the application process audit log Usage To obtain the process instance audit log for the application process execute the get process instance audit information command Installation folderNSWRBAMNbinNswrba audit The process instance audit information that can be obtained will be the process instance information that was complete after the command was executed the previous time Privilege Required Execution Environment Windows Manager 152 Administrator privileges are required If the operating system is Windows Server 2008 execute as the administrator This command can be executed on the admin server Linux Manager System administrator superuser privileges are requir
155. e settings of the replication function perform replication of the storage unit from the standby to the operating then wait until the status of the LUNs of the standby and operating storage become equivalent Execute the physical L Server startup script on the server where the manager is being operated This operation starts the physical L Server If an error occurs during execution of the script contact Fujitsu technical staff 00600000009209200990990909000000090909009900000000090900900909909290900090000000009090999909082000000009009900900900000000009099299 Physical L Servers are started in the order of the entries in the physical L Server startup script When the specification of the order of starting physical L Servers is necessary edit the physical L Server startup script 168 14 When operating an L Platform use the cfmg_syncdiskinfo command to reflect the information for switched disks on the L Platform configuration information Windows Manager gt Installation_tolde RCXCFMG bin cfmg_syncdiskinfo lt RETURN gt Linux Manager opt FJSVcfmg bin cfmg syncdiskinfo lt RETURN gt For details on the cfmg syncdiskinfo command refer to 12 7 cfmg syncdiskinfo disk information synchronization in the Reference Guide Command XML CE When Using Dynamic LUN Mirroring This document explains some changes and points to note when using dynamic LUN mirroring Prerequisites Refer to 7 2 Storage Chassis High Availabili
156. ecute the rexmgrbackup command Periodically executing the rexmgrbackup command allows the contents of updates to the database that are recorded in saved WAL files to be maintained for a certain period of time For example when the rexmgrbackup command is executed every hour the contents of updates performed in the most recent one hour period will be saved For details on the command refer to 6 6 rexmgrbackup in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Windows Manager Installation folderNSVRORMManagerMbinNVrexmgrbackup dir directory cleanup RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrcvmr bin rcxmgrbackup dir directory cleanup RETURN 10 1 3 1 Items to be Determined Before Periodic Execution The following items must be determined before periodic execution is implemented Items What to Decide 2 Determine the frequency of base backup F dt f base back M np RM M Example 3 00 a m on the 1st of every month Determine the fi f differential backup Frequency and timing of differential backup Kate p oo oer R Example Once per hour Determine the location of the backup Setting a disk other than the disk that installed the product is recommended Location of backup In addition sufficient capacity is required to be able to store the backup file Refer to 10 1 5 Online Backup Settings for Metering for information on how to set the backup destination 10 1 3 2 Settings for Periodic Execution of Backup The following
157. ed This command can be executed on the admin server Output files The following table shows the file name file size and generations of the audit log swrba audit log Audit logs are output 10 MB 10 9 Note The trigger for the generation switchover is when the file exceeds 10MB If the file size does not reach 10 MB the log continues to be output to the same file even if the swrba audit command is executed multiple times Once 10 generations 100 MB is exceeded the oldest file swrba audit9 log is deleted Destination The table below shows the log output destination Windows Manager Output folder Output destination files Installation_folde SWRB AM var audit swrba_audit log n n is the generation Linux Manager Output folder Output destination files lopt FJS Vswrbam var audit swrba audit log n n is the generation Output format The audit log is a CSV format file The following items are output in the following order One item of process instance information is displayed as one record Process instance start time Process instance starter Process instance name Process instance state Process instance end time Activity name Task execution date time Person responsible Status Task process Result of application Item Description Process instance start time Time when the application was executed Process instance starter User ID of applicant Process instance n
158. ed in the tenant management window of the ROR console usedtime metering cpu perf vserver When overcommit is enabled specify cpu reserve whether to calculate the CPU clock of the virtual server using CPU performance or CPU reserve performance cpu perf Calculate with CPU performance cpu reserve Calculate with CPU reserve performance usedtime metering memory vserver When overcommit is enabled specify memory reserve whether to calculate the memory usage of the virtual server using memory or memory reserve memory size Calculate with memory memory reserve Calculate with memory reserve note This can be set by Setup Wizard on the ROR Console An example is shown below accounting use yes omitted gui cutoffdate 20 gui sendmailaddress example xxx com omitted usedtime metering cpu perf vserver cpu_reserve usedtime metering memory vserver memory_reserve omitted 3 Restart the Manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to restart the manager 8 8 System Condition Server List Settings This section explains how to change the System Condition Server List settings 39 If the L Platform Management overcommit function is enabled the CPU and memory settings displayed in the System Condition Server List can be changed Refer to 19 6 Settings for the Overcommit Function in the Setup Guide CE for information on the L Platform Management overcommi
159. efer to the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE for the Resource tab operations Refer to the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE for other operations Infrastructure Administrator infra admin Management Operations The operations that infrastructure administrators infra admin can perform are as follow Management of resources and resource pools Registration modification and deletion of resources Creation deletion modification of global pools and tenant local pools Review and confirmation of application status and L Platform usage applications Management of tenants Creation modification and deletion of tenants Create a tenant administrator Creation modification and deletion of user accounts Management of templates Creation modification and deletion of L Platform templates Creation modification and deletion of L Server templates Note To check subscription requests submitted by using a created L Platform template use a dual role administrator account For more details refer to Appendix B Applying Subscribe for L Platform Usage by Dual Role Administrators in User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Infrastructure Administrator infra admin Maintenance Operations Maintenance operations that infrastructure administrators infra admin can perform are as follow Hardware maintenance System maintenance 2 Backup and restorati
160. eference Guide Command XML CE for more information about the command 7 2 4 Setting OS with Deployment on RHEL KVM Windows OS excluding Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 When the virtualization software is RHEL KVM the following OS configuration procedure is necessary on each deployed server with Windows OS to enable the settings of the IP addresses the default gateway and the host name 46 The infrastructure administrator must look up the IP addresses and the host name in the L Platform management window and the default gateway in the resource management window and then connect a console to the deployed server and configure the OS manually Users cannot access the server until this configuration is completed The administrator should include a description like The IP address needs to be set by the administrator after deployment in the description field of the L Platform template and notify users that the server has become accessible after the configuration Linux OS with SELinux enabled The administrator must disable SELinux when creating an image and should include a description like SELinux needs to be enabled after the deployment has been completed in the description field of the L Platform template Because Linux OS is deployed with SELinux disabled ensure that there are procedures in place to advise the user to enable SELinux after deployment 7 2 5 Startup Priority Level Settings Any server with a startup
161. enant s previous month s usage charges plus the usage charges by the L Platform they own YYYYMM is the date of the cut off date deleted is added when the tenant has already been deleted Usage charge detail file YYYYMM L PlatformlID csv File in CSV format showing the breakdown of usage charges for each L Platform YYYYMM is the date of the cut off Point 060606060200200000009009090000009090900905000009090909090000000990990909000009090909000000090909909000000900900000000000900000909299 Size of the usage charges file The size of usage charge files depends on the number of L Platforms deployed for the tenant and the configuration used For example if 200 L Platforms including two L Servers are deployed the file size is about 160 Kb 15 4 6 1 Usage Charge List File The usage charge list file is a file in CSV format showing the tenant s previous month s usage charges plus the usage charges by the L Platform they own The output items are as follows TenantDisplayName This is the display name Note 1 TenantDeletedDate This is the date and time the tenant was deleted Output only if the tenant has already been deleted Empty string is output if this has not been deleted Format YY Y Y MM DD HH mm ss SSS 1 Example 2013 03 31 23 59 59 999 This is the cut off date Format Y Y Y Y MM 1 Example 2013 03 TotalChargeAmount Total value of the usage charge for the tenant The amounts are values so they are
162. enants Create a Tenant Administrator Create a Tenant Resource Pool Create and Delete Tenants 12 Chapter 5 Managing Templates This chapter explains the management of templates L Platform Templates An L Platform template is the template to define the logical configuration of ICT resources and software An L Platform is composed of an L Platform template Use the Template tab to create modify and delete L Platform templates For details on the Template tab refer to Chapter 8 Template in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE L Server Templates An L Server template is the template defining the specifications of an L Server number of CPUs memory capacity disk capacity and number of NICs used for an L Platform Use the Resource tab to create modify and delete L Server templates For details on L Server template operations refer to Chapter 15 L Server Template Operations in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE 13 Chapter 6 Managing Resources and Resource Pools This chapter explains the management of resources and resource pools 6 1 Managing Resource Pools This section explains the management of resource pools The following resource pool operations are possible Addition and modification of tenants and local pools Deletion of local pools within tenants Addition modification and deletion of global pools When changing the glo
163. ent gt lt resource_type gt pserver lt resource_type gt lt user_id gt userId001 lt user_id gt server id serverId001 server id system name systemName001 system name server name serverName001 server name image name image001 image name storage pool storagePool001 storage pool disk size 1 disk size cpu num 1 cpu num cpu perf 3 cpu perf memory size 6 memory size server template name serverTemplateName001 server template name server pool serverPool001 server pool cpu input num 2 cpu input num cpu input perf 55 cpu input perf memory input size 8 memory input size entry entry entry meterlog Point 606060606202002920090600000990000000909090909000009090090990000000909909900000090900900000000900900000009990000000990909200000099299 Ifa change of tenant has been performed for an L Platform an event log with CHANGE as the event will be output 186 If snapshot restore has been performed an event log with CHANGE as the event will be output even if there was no change At execution of the Import L Server command of the L Platform Management function the following event log will be output If a stopped L Server has been imported Event log with ADD as the event If an active L Server has been imported Event log with ADD and START as the events Note An event indicating a stop of an L Server ST
164. ep 3 of 11 4 2 1 When an L Platform Using a Firewall is Identified 103 WS See For details on firewall operations login status confirmation definition extraction definition modification refer to the manuals of firewalls For details on the rexadm netdevice command refer to 3 8 rexadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on the rexadm firewall command refer to 3 4 rcxadm firewall in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 11 4 3 Server Load Balancer Status Confirmation This section explains the confirmation procedure of server load balancer status 11 4 3 1 When an L Platform Using a Server Load Balancer is Identified Use the following procedure to confirm the status of server load balancers 1 In the orchestration tree select the network device of a server load balancer under the L Platform 2 Select the Resource Details tab and click the link for Preserved resource of Network Device of Basic Information of Network Device The Resource Details tab of the network device is displayed 3 Confirm the displayed detailed information When the target network device is in redundant configuration confirm both the devices are in active status and standby status When there is a link for Launch Network Device Web UI in Hardware Details a Click the link and start the server load balancer management screen b Confirm event log and status interface system condition and op
165. eration status from the started management window and check the error detected by the server load balancer When there is no link for Launch Network Device Web UI in Hardware Details Confirm the following information displayed in the Main Panel Basic Information Device Status The status of the server load balancer is displayed When the status is something other than normal that is not intended by infrastructure administrator it indicates that an error might have occurred Port Information Link Status The port status of the server load balancer is displayed When the status is something other than up that is not intended by infrastructure administrator it indicates that a port error might have occurred Additionally confirm status system condition and operation status by logging the server load balancer directly and check the error detected by the server load balancer 4 Confirm the status of the server load balancer When server load balancing is not performed as expected or an event log is output The infrastructure administrator must confirm if the following items using auto configuration are correct Scripts for configurations Parameter files Configuration files for interfaces 104 Further confirm that the server to be load balanced is operating normally because the problem may be due to an error in the server When it is possible that the hardware has failed in cases that the server load
166. es used on the ROR console change to something other than normal 2 Investigation Request The tenant user requests investigation of the cause of the error by the tenant administrator based on the information related to detected errors error details the name of the resource where the error occurred the L Platform name The tenant administrator requests investigation of the cause of the error by the infrastructure administrator based on the information obtained from the tenant user 3 Status Confirmation The infrastructure administrator identifies the hardware to which resources are allocated using the obtained information and confirms their status 4 Problem Cause Investigation The infrastructure administrator identifies the cause by investigating the hardware on which the problem occurred 5 Corrective Action The infrastructure administrator takes corrective actions in order to resolve the problems with hardware 6 Reporting of Investigation Results The infrastructure administrator reports the results of the investigation after completing corrective action Flow of Hardware Maintenance when a Server Fails The following flowchart shows the procedure for maintaining hardware when failures occur on registered servers 45 Figure 9 3 Flow of Hardware Maintenance when a Server Fails Server switchover 3 For details on how to identify failures refer to 11 3 Addressing Resource Failures 2 For d
167. esponding L Platform templates does not exist in the metering log Refer to 15 3 3 Delete Accounting Information for information on how to delete the accounting information Refer also to Appendix B Metering Log for information on the metering log 121 Reference accounting information Reference the accounting information registered on the product master when calculating the accounting Refer to 15 3 4 Reference Accounting Information for information on how to reference the accounting information 15 3 1 Register Accounting Information Methods for registering accounting information differ for L Platform templates and L Servers that were imported into the system Register Accounting Information of L Platform template Create new L Platform templates and set the accounting information to the elements of the L Platform template that was created After finishing the registration of the accounting information enable the L Platform templates Follow the procedure below to register the accounting information 1 Register new L Platform templates Refer to 8 3 2 Creating New L Platform Template in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE for information on how to register L Platform templates Obtain a list of the template information registered Refer to 9 12 cfmg listtemplate Displaying Template Information List in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on how to obtain the template informa
168. etails on how to configure and release the maintenance mode refer to Appendix C Maintenance Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE 3 For details on server switchover failback and takeover refer to Chapter 4 Server Switchover in the Operation Guide VE 4 For details on backing up and restoring system images refer to Chapter 16 Backup and Restore in the User s Guide VE 5 For details on maintenance LED operations refer to 9 2 1 Maintenance LED Please note that maintenance LED operations are only supported for PRIMERGY BX servers 6 For details on re configuring hardware properties refer to 9 3 1 Reconfiguration of Hardware Properties 7 For details on power control refer to Chapter 14 Power Control in the User s Guide VE The following hardware replacements can be performed Replacing Servers Replace a server that has been registered in Resource Orchestrator For details on replacing servers refer to 9 3 2 Replacing Servers Replacing Server Components Replace hardware components such as a NIC HBA or hard disk of a registered server For details on replacing or adding server components refer to 9 3 3 Replacing and Adding Server Components 46 Replacing Non Server Hardware Replace registered chassis management blades or any other hardware components external to servers For details on replacing non server hardware refer to 9 3 4 Repla
169. etbackuperror being executed and then the Manager is stopped subsequent starts of the Manager may fail If this happens an error message will be output to the database log files as follows Database Log Files Installation_folder RCXCTMG Charging log psql nn log Note The nn part is a 2 digit numeral indicating the day on which the log was output Error Message Example If the access control database failed to start LOG could not open file pg_xlog xxxxxxxx log file 0 segment xx No such file or directory LOG invalid checkpoint record PANIC could not locate required checkpoint record HINT If you are not restoring from a backup try removing the file C Fujitsu ROR RCXCTMG Charging pgsql data backup label Note The xxxxxxxx and xx parts of the log are undefined In a case like this delete the file shown below When this file is deleted start of the Manager will end normally When this file is deleted start of the Manager will end normally Installation folderNRCXCTMGNChargingNMpgsqlNdataNbackup label Differential Backup With differential backup the contents of updates to the database are output to multiple files in 16 MB sized lots These files are called Write Ahead Logging WAL files Usually for each 16 MB written the WAL file being written to is switched and the WAL file for which writing has been completed is saved to the wal directory under the backup directory 83 Ex
170. ettings and deletion operations described below are required for cluster operation For details on the settings for cluster operation and the procedure for deletion refer to Appendix D Manager Cluster Operation Settings and Deletion in the Setup Guide VE Settings Primary Node Create cluster resources Copy dynamic disk files Perform link settings for folders on the shared disk Set folder and file access rights Setaccess rights for the Resource Orchestrator database Change the IP address set for the manager s admin LAN Register service resources Start the cluster service Secondary Node Perform link settings for folders on the shared disk Setaccess rights for the Resource Orchestrator database Change the IP address set for the manager s admin LAN Start the cluster service Deletion Primary Node Stop the cluster service Delete service resources Uninstall the manager Secondary Node Uninstall the manager Delete shared disk files Delete cluster resources 171 Note If switchover of an admin server occurs while L Servers are operating the operation being performed may fail If you were creating or registering resources delete unnecessary resources and then perform the operation again When performing L Server creation or ETERNUS configuration information modification using ETERNUS if an error occurs on an admin server ETERNUS may not be able to return from the status of
171. etwork device administrator should request a hardware maintenance person to take corrective action when hardware has failed 5 Take corrective action based on the results of checked scripts and files When there are no errors in the scripts or settings in files checked in 4 Confirm with the administrator ofthe network device that the L2 switch configuration has not been modified since an unexpected definition modification may have been made 106 When there are errors in the scripts or settings in files checked in 4 The infrastructure administrator will log in to the L2 switch directly delete the failed configurations and modify error scripts or files 6 Take corrective action based on the check results if definitions have been modified When the network device administrator has not modified the configuration Extract the L2 switch definitions and check the content When inappropriate settings have been configured log in to the L2 switch directly and modify the definitions When a network device administrator has modified the configuration Check that the configuration modification is necessary When the configuration modification is not necessary The infrastructure administrator must log in to the L2 switch directly and delete or modify the problem causing configuration When configuration modifications were necessary based on the system operation policy Review if the details of scripts and parameter files are
172. evice file please confirm the note of 9 4 8 2 When using management function of file for configuration of network device in the Design Guide CE before executing restoration in the procedure 6 006000000000909292909909099090000009090999909090909000000090090990909009900900000000909099990909000000009090990909090920000000009209999 Restore configuration of replaced network device using network device file which was backed up in procedure 4 along by maintenance procedure of the network device When operating restoration to log in to replaced network device directly 1 Export network device file which was backed up in procedure 4 with rexadm netdevice cfexport command 2 Restore exported network device file along by maintenance procedure of the network device When operating restoration to use the restoration function of the management function for network device file 1 Configure replaced network device definition that are needed in operation management 63 9 10 2 Restore network device file A Information 600060000000000992090990990900000009090909090900900000000900900990909000000000909090992099090900900000009999099090006000099 When replaced network device is Cisco ASA 5500 series operating restoration by rcxadm netdevice cfrestore command is not required By function of Cisco ASA 5500 series same configuration as device of active state is reflected automatically For detail please refer to manual of Cisco ASA 55
173. f G amp Note Physical L Servers are stopped in the order of the entries in the physical L Server stopping script When specification of the order of stopping physical L Servers is necessary edit the physical L Server stopping script Delete the zoning combining the WWPN of the HBA of the physical L Server and the WWPN of the port of the standby storage from the Fibre Channel switch For ETERNUS storage this step is not necessary as the zoning for Fibre Channel switch will be deleted by Resource Orchestrator when the failback script is executed Stop the storage replication function 10 Execute the failback script on the server where the manager is being operated If the error message number 62513 occurs during script execution The Thin Provisioning and Thick Provisioning attributes of the operating disk resource and standby disk resource may be not the same Check the replication definition file and define the disk resource with the same attributes of Thin Provisioning and Thick Provisioning When an error other than the above has occurred Contact Fujitsu technical staff To access the operating storage add the zoning combining the WWPN of the HBA of the physical L Server and the WWPN of the port of the operating storage to the Fibre Channel switch For ETERNUS storage this step is not necessary as the zoning for Fibre Channel switch will be added by Resource Orchestrator when the failback script is executed By modifying th
174. f operation logs Periodic deletion Due to extended periods of operation or modification of retention periods operation logs which have exceeded a certain retention period are periodically deleted The timing of deletion based on retention period checks is set to take place as the first operation after the date changes amp Note 0602020220990000009099099000000909090929090000090909909909000000909090990909909000090909000000009090099900909009009909090000090999090900009999 The recording period is the retention period 1 After periodic deletion is performed the recording period will be equal to the retention period Periodic deletion is executed when the next recording is started the first recording after the date changes and operation logs will be deleted in chronological order Deletion Users can delete unnecessary operation logs by defining a retention period Backup and Restore Use the following procedure for backup and restoration of operation logs Backup 1 Confirm the retention folder for the operation logs 2 Stop recording operation logs 3 Back up the retention folder confirmed in 1 4 Start recording operation logs Restore 1 Confirm the retention folder for the operation logs 2 Stop recording operation logs 3 Restore the backed up folder into the retention folder confirmed in 1 4 Start recording operation logs Modification of the settings in the Date and Time properties dialog af
175. f the error message number 62513 occurs during script execution The Thin Provisioning and Thick Provisioning attributes of the operating disk resource and standby disk resource may be not the same Check the replication definition file and define the disk resource with the same attributes of Thin Provisioning and Thick Provisioning When an error other than the above has occurred Contact Fujitsu technical staff To access the standby storage add the zoning combining the WWPN of the HBA of the physical L Server and the WWPN of the port of the standby storage to the Fibre Channel switch For ETERNUS storage this step is not necessary as the zoning for Fibre Channel switch will be added by Resource Orchestrator when the failover script is executed When perform reading or writing for the LUN of the standby storage modify the settings of replication if necessary Execute the physical L Server startup script on the server where the manager is being operated This operation starts the physical L Server If an error occurs during execution of the script contact Fujitsu technical staff amp Note 00606060200000909909099090099090900000909090909090090900000090909000009090000000009099909909090990000000000000909000000009099299 Physical L Servers are started in the order of the entries in the physical L Server startup script When the specification of the order of starting physical L Servers is necessary edit the physical L Server startup scri
176. fer to the Data ONTAP Storage Management Guide 108 Chapter 12 Collecting Power Consumption Data and Displaying Graphs This chapter explains how to export the power consumption data collected from registered power monitoring targets and how to display it as graphs and also describes the exported data s format 12 1 Overview This section details the power consumption data that is collected from registered power monitoring targets Resource Orchestrator calculates the power in Watts and energy Watt hours consumed by a power monitoring target by multiplying its collected electrical current Amperes by its registered voltage value Volts This data can then be exported to a file in CSV format or as a graph The data can then be summarized or visualized as a graph using an external tool such as Excel to obtain a graphical representation of the power consumed by each power monitoring target A Information 006060602000900909000090909909909909000009090909000009090929099099099000090909909909000090900290900000090990909909909000090900990990000099990000099299 In Resource Orchestrator power consumption is calculated as the product of electrical current A multiplied by voltage V Normally power consumption is the product of an electrical current multiplied by a voltage and an additional phase factor if the phase difference between the current and voltage is defined as 0 this factor is expressed as cos 0 0606
177. ference that is a problem log in to the network device directly after replacement and resolve the difference Release the maintenance mode of network devices when problems with network devices after replacement have been solved Notification that maintenance operations are complete When the management function for network device configuration files is used 1 2 Announcement of planned maintenance operations Log in the network device directly to check if the target network device of replacement is in active status or standby status When the target network device of replacement is in active status switch over the device with the standby network device of redundancy configuration and change the status of target network device for replacement from active status to standby status Change the target network device to the maintenance mode Back up the current network device files from the network devices that are switched to maintenance mode If the content of the backed up device configuration file is up to date this step is not required If the content is not the up to date take a backup of the network device configuration file using the rexadm netdevice cfbackup command The date and time of backup can be checked using the rexadm netdevice cflist command Replace the network devices Hardware maintenance person A Information When registering Nexus 5000 series as network device using the management function for network d
178. figure Resource Orchestrator with the new hardware properties For PRIMERGY BX servers the hardware properties are automatically re configured G amp Note Ensure this operation is performed only after the replacement of one of the following a server itself the NIC used for either the admin or public LAN or the HBA If it is not there is a possibility that operations on the server will not run correctly After replacing the hardware the server status becomes unknown The appropriate status can be restored by re configuring the hardware properties from the server Prerequisites The following prerequisites must be satisfied before this operation can be performed Both the replaced server and replacement server must be the same model A warning message is shown if the model of the replacement server differs from that of the replaced server When replacing a PRIMERGY BX server the replacement server must be inserted into the same slot as used for the replaced server Hardware properties cannot be re configured from a server inserted in a different slot An error occurs if no server is inserted in the slot occupied by the previous server The replaced server and replacement server must both be of the same blade type If the blade types of the replaced and replacement servers are different an error will occur To move a server to a different slot within a chassis the server must be deleted first and then registered again after being
179. for which an error was detected Execute the rexadm chassis show command to check For details on the rexadm chassis show command refer to 3 2 rexadm chassis in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 162 3 Check if the status of the L Server that is the source for switchover is stop If the status of the L Server is not stop stop the L Server The L Server cannot be stopped as the management blade cannot be accessed Stop the L Server on the managed server using the console of managed server amp Note If switchover is performed while an L Server in a chassis that has trouble is still operating there is a possibility that another instance of the L Server will be started and its disks damaged Ensure the L Server is stopped 4 Place the server into maintenance mode For details on how to place servers into maintenance mode refer to Appendix C Maintenance Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE Execute the rexadm server command from the command line For details on the rexadm server command refer to 3 11 rcxadm server in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 5 Start the L Server Start the L Server on the switchover destination server For details on how to start an L Server refer to 17 1 1 Starting an L Server in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE 6 Release the server that has been switched to from maintenance mode
180. g to back up and restore a system image 3 Power OFF Shut down the server to replace if it is still powered on For details on shutting down servers refer to Chapter 14 Power Control in the User s Guide VE 54 4 Replace the Server Replace the server Change the BIOS settings of the replacement server to match the operating environment For details on BIOS settings refer to 8 2 Configure the Server Environment in the Design Guide CE Shut down the server after completing BIOS settings Configure the remote management controller of the replacement server with the same IP address user name password and SNMP trap destination as those set on the original server 5 Re configure Hardware Properties after Replacement After replacing the server re configure Resource Orchestrator with the latest hardware properties For details on how to re configure hardware properties refer to 9 3 1 Reconfiguration of Hardware Properties 6 Restore the Boot Disk Local Boot There is no need to restore the boot disk if the original disk is installed on the replaced server Simply power on the replacement server If the boot disk was replaced and a system image backup was collected restore that backup Refer to 16 3 Restoring a System Image in the User s Guide VE for details on how to restore a system image After the system image is restored the server will be automatically powered on If there is no backup of the system imag
181. ged depending on the usage environment To change the configuration edit the following definition file When there is no definition file create one Placeholder for the Definition File Windows Manager Installation foldeNSVRORMManagerVetce customize data Linux Manager etc opt FJS Vrcvmr customize data Definition File Name rcx_base rexprop Format of the Definition File Describe the definition file in individual lines as below Key Value Items in the Definition File Specify the following items Table A 2 Items in the Definition File The default value is 30 Specify the multiplicity Multiplicity Task WORKER COUNT from 5 30 For basic mode the default value is 5 175 Operates by default when there are no definition files Example Definition File An example definition file is indicated below In this example the multiplicity is set to 10 TASK WORKER COUNT 10 Changing Procedures of Definition Files When the manager is operating in a normal environment l 2 3 Stop the manager Change TASK WORKER COUNT values for rcx base rcxprop files When there is no rcx base rcxprop file create one Start the manager When the manager is operating in a cluster environment Windows Manager 1 2 4 Stop the manager Place the shared disk of the manager online Place other cluster resources offline Change the TASK WORKER COUNT values forrcx base rcxprop files o
182. gt false lt entry gt entry key serverByOrg_ROR bottom column 11 label gt Reserved CPU clock speed GHz lt entry gt entry key serverByOrg_ROR bottom column 11 path gt cmdb item cmdb record type observed rc LogicalServer reservedCPUClock lt entry gt lt entry key serverByOrg_ROR bottom column 11 width gt 135 lt entry gt omitted lt entry key serverByOrg_ROR bottom column 14 isEnable gt false lt entry gt entry key serverByOrg_ROR bottom column 14 label gt Reserved memory size GB lt entry gt entry key serverByOrg_ROR bottom column 14 path gt cmdb item cmdb record type observed rc LogicalServer reservedMemorySize lt entry gt lt entry key serverByOrg_ROR bottom column 14 width gt 140 lt entry gt omitted lt properties gt Note If the L Platform Management overcommit function is disabled when the viewlist en xml overcommit setting is enabled the CPU Reserve Clock Rate and the Memory Reserve Size columns are displayed but the values are not displayed 40 When editing the viewlist en xml file do not change any settings items other than serverByOrg ROR bottom column 11 isEnable and serverByOrg ROR bottom column 14 isEnable Save the viewlist en xml file before you edit the file If any settings other than serverByOrg ROR bottom column 11 isEnable and serverByOrg ROR bottom column 14 isEnable are changed restore the saved file 06060060000909099090000609090090209
183. gure virtual networks for VLANs on physical networks in cases where it is necessary to perform auto configuration of multiple switches at the same time or to configure the same rules for network devices in redundant configurations The script lists contain the scripts used to perform automatic configuration There are the following eight types of script lists script lists for setup script lists for setup error recovery script lists for modification script lists for modification error recovery script lists for setup physical server added script lists for setup error recovery physical server added 199 script lists for deletion physical server deleted script lists for deletion server A computer operated with one operating system server blade A server blade has the functions of a server integrated into one board They are mounted in blade servers server management unit A unit used for managing servers A management blade is used for blade servers and a Remote Management Controller is used for other servers server name The name allocated to a server server NIC definition A definition that describes the method of use for each server s NIC For the NICs on a server it defines which physical LAN segment to connect to server virtualization software Basic software which is operated on a server to enable use of virtual machines Used to indicate the basic software that operates on a
184. hat make it easy to distinguish whether automatic server release settings are enabled or disabled p Example 0660606200020000000900900000090909090909200000909090909909000000909090990000009090909000000009090909909900000090090900000000009090000090299 L Server template name where automatic server release settings are disabled VMware Small 9 L Server template name where automatic server release settings are enabled VMware Small Repurpose 6060606060092090906000000909090909090000909090909909000009009099090000000909090909000000909090909090000009090990900000000909090909000000990000000999 7 2 10 Definition VM Specific Information Definition File If an overcommit value has not been set for the L Server template selected in type on the Reconfiguration page of the L Platform subscription window then the values set in VM specific information definition file will not be used even if the file is used Rather the following values are applied VMware CPU Reserved 0 1GHz CPU Shares 1000 Memory Reserved Memory Size Memory Shares Memory Size 10240 Hyper V CPU Reserved 0 1GHz CPU Weight 100 Memory RAM Memory Size Memory Weight 5000 With L Server templates used in L Platforms set the values for overcommit in the L Server templates rather than in a definition VM specific information definition file 7 2 11 Changing Server Specifications on a VM Host In L Platform subscription and L Platform
185. he command refer to 6 6 rexmgrbackup in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Windows Manager gt Installation_folder SVROR Manager bin rcexmgrbackup dir directory cleanup RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrcvmr bin rcxmgrbackup dir directory cleanup RETURN When the management function for Network device configuration file is used save the following folders and files under that folder Windows Manager gt Installation_folder SVROR Manager var netdevice Linux Manager var opt FJSVrcvmr netdevice 10 1 2 3 Starting the Manager Execute the command shown below to start the Manager For details on the command refer to 5 19 rcxmgrctl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Windows Manager gt Installation folderNSVRORMManagerMbinNrexmgrctl start RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrcvmr bin rcxmgrctl start RETURN 81 Saving Image Management Information Check the following image management information the number of stored snapshot generations and the image file storage folder Number of Stored Snapshot Generations Image File Storage Folder Execute the following command to set the number of stored snapshot generations and the image storage folder information to a standard output by redirecting the information to a file and then saving it Windows Manager gt Installation folderNSVRORMManagerWMbinNrcexadm imagemgr info gt file RETURN Linux Manager op
186. he default value for retention period Do not change the values for the following keys from the default periodic log use periodic log schedule time periodic log schedule type periodic log schedule day 00600600009009909000909090909099000009090990990909090000909090090990990900090909090990990900000909090900900000909909099009000000909099090000000909000000999 8 7 4 Usage Charge Calculator Settings This section describes how to change the settings for the usage charge calculator function The procedure for changing the settings is as follows 1 Open the following operating environment file Windows Manager Installation folderNRCXCTMGNChargingNconfNaccounting properties Linux Manager etc opt FJSVctchg conf accounting properties 2 Setthe following items in the operating environment file 38 accounting use Specify whether to use the usage charge calculator yes Use the usage charge calculator no Do not use the usage charge calculator gui cutoffdate Specify the default for the cut off date 31 displayed in the tenant management window of the ROR console Specify a value between 1 and 31 In cases where the specified date does not exist the cut off date will be the end of the month For example if 31 is specified but the month only contains 30 days then the 30th will be the cut off date gui sendmailaddress Specify the default for the address to send None the usage fee display
187. he rcxadm logctl set command to configure the retention period for operation logs For details on the rcxadm logctl set command refer to 5 13 rcxadm logctl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 4 Start recording of the operation log Execute the rcxadm logctl start command to start recording the operation log When the rcxadm logctl start command is executed the operation logs will be recorded for the configured retention period from the date recording of operation logs is started Days when no events occur or days when recording is not possible due to the manager being stopped are not counted as dates for recording Note 006060600000099092909909009090000090090999099009000000009920900909020900000000090090909909909909090000000900990009909000000009099299 When the settings of the OS Date and Time Properties dialog have been changed after starting the recording of operation logs It may not be possible to correctly display or delete the operation logs When changing the settings of the OS Date and Time Properties dialog after starting the recording of operation logs Refer to 16 1 3 Retention When a Cloud Edition license has been registered When starting the manager recording of operation logs is started automatically 0 00606000009009099909900909090000009090990909009000000009090000409000000000900909990990909090000000009009009909000000009099299 138 16 1 3 Retention This section explains the retention o
188. heir respective servers admin server managed server Normally there should be no need to manually start or stop either the manager or agents To start or stop a manager or an agent intentionally refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager and 2 2 Starting and Stopping an Agent amp Note When using the HBA address rename function ensure that the manager is started before starting any managed servers The power on procedure should be managed as follows first start the admin server together with any storage devices and start the managed servers 10 minutes later Managed servers will not boot up properly if they are started before the manager Make sure that the manager is running before starting managed servers Storage Admin Server Managed Server Manager 10 minutes later Additionally when using the HBA address rename function the HBA address rename setup service should be started on a dedicated server HBA address rename server and left running continuously For details on starting stopping and confirming the state of the HBA address rename setup service refer to Chapter 10 Settings for the HBA address rename Setup Service in the Setup Guide CE 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager The Resource Orchestrator manager starts automatically on the admin server This section explains how to manually start or stop the manager and how to check its running state Windows Manager The manager is made up of the followi
189. hen a VM guest is in unknown status check the operation status of the VM host on which the VM guest is running 3 When a LAN switch is in unknown status check the physical connection between the LAN switch and admin LAN as well as whether or not the LAN switch is responding to commands 97 G amp Note On the SPARC Enterprise T series as statuses cannot be obtained from ILOM using SNMP only normal stop or unknown on statuses are shown while warning error and fatal statuses cannot be detected If an SNMP Trap indicating an error is displayed check the status of the server on ILOM For other servers hardware statuses cannot be obtained from server management software ServerView Therefore only normal on stop or unknown statuses are shown while warning error and fatal statuses cannot be detected For PRIMEQUEST all partitions within the same chassis may temporarily become unknown depending on the timing of change in power control status of the partition Table 11 5 Physical Server Icons Table 11 6 OS Icons Emo wem 7 Hm memes Ce ae A Information 06006000009090090090909099099000090909099909909000090909909990900090909909099090000090990990990900000909090099090000090999099090000909990900900009299 For server virtualization software the following information is also displayed VM management software VM management software statuses can be one of th
190. hen the L Platform resource is actually secured L Server Changing CHANGE When a resource is changed Disk is Deleting DELETE When a resource deletion is requested If an approval workflow is enabled when an L Platform template 1 approval or assessment is performed Software 2 START When starting a resource is complete L Server Stopping STOP When stopping a resource is requested The event log for L Platform template is output for tenant specific templates The event log is not output for global templates The CHANGE log will be output if the template name is changed If only other basic information and configuration information are changed the CHANGE log will not be output 2 The event log for software will be output based on the software information that has been registered in the image information of the L Server The timing of software addition or deletion events is synchronized with L Server addition or deletion events respectively Periodic logs Periodic logs are logs that show the periodic operational status of resources The following table shows the timing at which periodic logs will be output Period PERIOD Every day at 0 00 default 1 L Platform L Server Disk 178 L Platform template 2 Software If the timing of output of the periodic log is to be changed overwrite the metering log operational settings file and then execute the Change periodic log schedule settings com
191. his column displays the date and time at which each data sample was collected Within data lines the entry corresponding to this column is displayed in the following format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss C YYYY Year MM Month DD Date hh mm ss Hours Minutes Seconds The time is displayed according to the time zone set in the admin server operating system power monitoring target name data type The power monitoring target name part displays the name of the selected target The data type part displays the following data types Power W is shown as power Average Power W as power average Energy Wh as energy Data lines Each data line contains data values corresponding to each of the column titles shown in the header line A hyphen is displayed for any data that could not be collected amp Note Regardless of the specified power monitoring target the data held within Resource Orchestrator that fits the conditions given for the selected time span and rate will be exported Depending on the statuses of specified power monitoring targets the data corresponding to the specified time span and rate may not have been collected In this case a hyphen will be displayed for any data that could not be collected Hyphens can be displayed when data was collected from another power monitoring target including a deleted one at the same collection time and data was not collected from the specified power monitoring
192. ibre Channel ports of the same WWPN are unique they are used as identifiers during Fibre Channel port login Also referred to as a port WWN WWPN zoning The division of ports into zones based on their WWPN and setting of access restrictions between different zones 204 Xen A type of server virtualization software XSB eXtended System Board Unit for domain creation and display composed of physical components XSCF eXtended System Control Facility The name of the Remote Management Controller for SPARC Enterprise M series servers zoning A function that provides security for Fibre Channels by grouping the Fibre Channel ports of a Fibre Channel switch into zones and only allowing access to ports inside the same zone 205
193. ical Servers or Virtual Machines as L Servers b Network Information Settings for Converted L Servers Refer to 7 2 3 1 Network Information Settings for Converted L Servers 15 c Importing the L Server for which network information has been set Refer to 7 2 3 2 Importing L Servers Import L Servers created in the ROR console into the L Platform Refer to 7 2 3 2 Importing L Servers 7 2 3 1 Network Information Settings for Converted L Servers Set the network information for the L Servers converted in Use of Physical Servers or Virtual Machines as L Servers Execute the rcxadm Iserver attach define command to set network information The setting of network information via the command rcxadm lserver attach define can only be performed on the L Server before it is imported into the L Platform management function Also the rcxadm Iserver attach define command can only be executed if using Solaris container If adding multiple network interface cards NICs execute the command rcxadm lserver attach define only the same number of times as there are NICs being added Refer to 3 6 rcxadm Iserver in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for details 7 2 3 2 Importing L Servers The Import L Server command cfmg importlserver can be used to import servers that have been deployed or the VM guests that have been imported using the ROR Console to the L Platform Management function Refer to 12 4 cfmg_importlserver Impor
194. igurations can be done quickly when network devices are replaced due to network failures Network device configuration files can be backed up and saved within 5 generations If the number of saved generations exceeds 5 generations old generations will be deleted starting with the oldest generation Network device environment file can be backed up and saved only 1 generation If backup is performed the saved network device environment file will be deleted automatically This product supports the backup and restoration of the following network devices configuration files Table 10 9 Network Devices that are supported by Device Configuration File Management Network Device Hardware 7 Environment File Configuration File configl SR X series None config2 ipcomenv Ziost name firmware version number time gz host name Target IPCOM EX series host name firmware version number current firmware version Fujitsu IPCOM EX series running config cli number startup config cli time The time when backup was performed Example ipcomenv ipcom E20L10NF0001B01 20120802 103845 tgz running config cli nsappliance P adaress tgz NS Appliance startup config cli Example nsappliance 192 168 1 1 tgz ine confi pem jd i iii startup config ine confi Rn in 4 startup config ine confi startup config BIG IP Local Traffi F5 Networks 2 did ee config scf environment ucs Manager series For details on the target network devices
195. image backup was collected restore that backup Refer to 16 3 Restoring a System Image in the User s Guide VE for details on how to restore a system image After the system image is restored the server will be automatically powered on If there is no backup of the system image run the installation program again SAN Boot As the replaced server can be easily configured to access the original boot disk using HBA address rename there is no need to restore the boot disk Simply power on the replacement server 7 Release Maintenance Mode Release the replaced server from maintenance mode For details on maintenance mode refer to Appendix C Maintenance Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE Servers with no Agent Registered Use the following procedure to replace servers on which no Resource Orchestrator agent was registered 1 Power OFF Shut down the server to replace if it is still powered on For details on shutting down servers refer to Chapter 14 Power Control in the User s Guide VE 2 Replace the Server Replace the server Use the Maintenance Wizard of the Management Board Web UI to perform replacement For details on the Maintenance Wizard refer to the PRIMEQUEST manual Also change the BIOS settings of the replacement server to match the operating environment For details on BIOS settings refer to 8 2 Configure the Server Environment in the Design Guide CE
196. imal format without zero suppression p Example 192 168 1 24 0x0001 192 168 2 25 0x00 05 192 168 1 24 0x0002 192 168 2 25 0x00 06 192 168 3 25 0x0001 192 168 4 26 0x00 05 0060606200060000909060006060000609900009000900900600009009099090909090000900909909000900909090909060000090900000060600090999000600009990609999 A Information When replicating using the Copy Control Module of ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopyManager a replication definition file can be created For details on the rcxrepdef command refer to 5 22 rcxrepdef in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 606606000000090929090000009090990909909000090909909909000009009290900000000909909909000090090909090000090929090000000090900000009999000996 For EMC CLARiiON The relationship for replication can be checked using the MirrorView function Specify an IP address for the storage identifier Check the IP address using the rcxadm storage list command For details on volume identifiers check them using the MirrorView function Volume identifiers are written in hexadecimal format without zero suppression ja Example 192 168 1 24 0x0001 192 168 2 25 0x000 5 192 168 1 24 0x0002 192 168 2 25 0x000 6 192 168 3 25 0x0001 192 168 4 26 0x000 5 165 For EMC Symmetrix DMX storage and EMC Symmetrix VMAX storage The relationship for replication can be checked using the SRDF function Specify SymmID for the storage identifier Check SymmID using the rcxadm storage l
197. ined true Enables the function 3 Save the file 4 Restart the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to restart the manager 8 5 4 Distribution Ratio Settings The distribution ratio settings set a simple selection method for the distribution ratios of CPUs and memory that correspond to the distribution ratio settings of VMware Note that the settings are enabled only if the simplified reconfiguration function has been disabled To change the settings implement the following procedure Refer to 8 3 14 L Platform Reconfiguration in the User s Guide for Tenant Administrators CE for details on changing the configuration Point 60606060620009200000009009000000909090990909000009090909909090000009099090600000000909090900000090090000000090990000000090090900000909299 Distribution Ratio Settings can be set by Setup Wizard on the ROR Console For details of Setup Wizard refer to 3 1 Setup Wizard in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE 1 Use the editor to open the settings file The settings file is stored in the following location Windows Manager Installation folderNRCXCTMGMMyPortalNconfigNmanagerview config xml Linux Manager etc opt FJSVctmyp config managerview config xml 2 Add the following keys and values share easy setting false Directly edits values This is the default value This is applicable even when this key is not defined
198. information operation result Output files The date time when the operation was performed The date time is output using the following format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS sss local time The user ID of the user that performed the operation The tenant name of the user that executed the operation If the operation is performed from tenant management GUI the tenant name is fixed as ctmgadm The type of the operation performed Refer to Operation types and operation information for details Detailed information for the operation type Refer to Operation types and operation information for details The result of the operation performed One of the following values is output SUCCESS When the operation was successful FAILURE When the operation failed Audit logs are output to the following files Tenant management GUI operations from the ROR Console Tenant management creating users from the ROR Console Provisional account registration method Accounting Output file Windows Manager Installation foldeNRCXCTMQGNSecurityManagementMogctsec audit a log Linux Manager var opt FJS Vctsec log ctsec audit a log Windows Manager Installation foldeNRCXCTMQGNSecurityManagementMogctsec audit s log Linux Manager var opt FJS Vctsec log ctsec audit s log Windows Manager Installation_folde RCXCTMG Charging log ctchg_audit log Linux Manager var opt FJS Vctchg log ctchg_audit log 147 Acco
199. init d scwagent start lt RETURN gt 3t letc rc2 d S99ssqcdcm start lt RETURN gt Stop Jetc init d scwagent stop RETURN letc rc0 d K00ssqcdcm stop RETURN Solaris The agent consists of the following services Agent Service Execute the following commands to determine whether the agent is running or not If those commands show that the processes for the agent and deployment services are running then the agent can be asserted to be running bin ps ef grep FJSVrcvat lt RETURN gt The following explains how to start and stop each service Agents can be started and stopped using the start and stop subcommands of the rcxadm agtctl command For details of the command refer to 5 3 rcxadm agtctl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 10 Chapter 3 Managing User Accounts This chapter explains the management of user accounts Creation Viewing and Modification of User Accounts Only users that hold the role of infrastructure administrator tenant administrator or administrator can create user accounts For details on operations by infrastructure administrators refer to Chapter 3 Configuring Users for Infrastructure Administrators in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE For details on operations by tenant administrators refer to Chapter 10 Tenant in the User s Guide for Tenant Administrators CE Viewing and Modification of Information of Logged in Users T
200. ion of application Terms of use or terms of cancellation of Change to terms of use or terms of L Platform cancellation Terms of use or terms of cancellation of Change to terms of use or terms of Y L Platform cancellation Remarks Capacity Planning data is not included in backups Export the data to CSV or Excel files by using the Capacity Planning window N Y Y Y Y Y Y as necessary Disk Space Necessary for the Backup Disk space necessary for the backup is as follows Table 10 2 Resource to be Backed Up and Disk Space Necessary for the Backup Target Resources Disk Space Necessary for the Backup The file size of backup files varies depending on the number of resources defined in the configuration definition information When the number of VM guests is 1000VM collection information temporarily becomes about 150 MB It becomes less than 2 MB by Configuration definition information A762 Target Resources Disk Space Necessary for the Backup compressing it Please prepare the backup area referring to this size Every time when backing up it is necessary Therefore when the backup is executed three times for instance the capacity of image System image or cloning image save area is three times necessary For the capacity of the image storage area refer to 2 4 2 5 Dynamic Disk Space in the Design Guide VE Certificates Session cryptography key The size of the file backed up changes according to
201. ion information XML definition refer to 14 6 Network Configuration Information in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on the rexadm netdevice command refer to 3 8 rcxadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on ruleset creation and the registration destinations refer to F 3 Creating a Folder for Registering Rulesets in the Setup Guide CE For details on how to create a tenant refer to 11 3 Creating Tenants in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE For details on how to register tenant administrators refer to Chapter 3 Operating User Accounts in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE For details on how to register a resource in a resource pool refer to Chapter 19 Resource Operations in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE 9 5 4 Procedure for Addition or Modification of Connection Destinations of Network Devices This section explains the procedure for adding or modifying destinations for network device connection When there is no description the following operations are performed by an infrastructure administrator 1 Notify your infrastructure administrator about the addition or modification of the destination for network device connection Network device administrator 70 2 Create network configuration information XML definition using the acquired network device i
202. ist command Specify a device for the volume identifier Check the device using the SRDF function Volume identifiers are written in hexadecimal format without zero suppression p Example 096060600062000909000000009990900000909090000000090092909909000000999000000090990909000009000990909000000099090000000999090600099 000192601264 0001 000192601265 0005 000192601264 0002 000192601265 0006 000192601274 0001 000192601275 0005 060606060606060090090900200606000009990000900909090906000000909909090909000990990909900609000990990900600000009909000000090990900606000999906090999 When Performing Switchover from Operating to Standby Failover This section explains the procedure to perform switchover from operating storage units to standby storage units 1 Create the replication definition file For details on replication definition files refer to Replication Definition Files 2 Create the following scripts by executing the rcxstorage failover command failover script Physical L Server stopping script Physical L Server startup script For details on the rcxstorage command refer to 5 23 rcxstorage in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Create these scripts in units of operating storage These scripts are created based on the configuration information at the time which the command is executed When changing configurations create these scripts again Execute the rcxstorage command with the failover option when an oper
203. itor to open the settings file The settings file is stored in the following location Windows Manager Installation folderNRCXCTMGMMyPortalNconfigNmanagerview config xml Linux Manager etc opt FJSVctmyp config managerview config xml 2 Add the following keys and values maximum number of connections in template Specify the maximum number of L Servers that can be placed in the L Platform Template Without a key the default value is 30 maximum number of connections in segment Specify the maximum number of NICs in the segment of the L Platform Template Without a key the default value is 30 G amp G Note 9 00606000090099099290999099099099090000009099990990999900000099209909900909909009000000009999990999090000009099909999290990900000909099999 If there is a firewall the maximum number of connections in the segment defined in the ruleset will be the smaller value out of the maximum number of servers in the ruleset and the configured value of the maximum number of connections in segment Segments that are not defined in the firewall ruleset will use the configured value 3 Save the file 4 Restart the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to restart the manager 8 5 11 Customizing the User Rights for L Platform Operations Itis possible to customize the user rights in the L Platform management window to suit the role of the user tenant administrator or tenant user Custo
204. l and System Condition This section explains audit logs of output by the tenant management accounting access control and system condition functions Point 060606062000090000000099000000909090909090000009099099090900000909990909000090909090000000009090909900000090999090000000990900000909299 If L Platform Management is operated audit logs will be output to Configuration Manager Refer to 16 2 1 Configuration Management Audit Log for details Audit logs relating to the registration modification or deletion of infrastructure administrators infrastructure operators infrastructure monitors administrators operators and or monitors can be checked in the OpenDS access log The storage locations and file names of OpenDS access logs are as follows Windows Manager OpenDS Installation foldeopendsMogsNaccess 146 Linux Manager lopt fujitsu ServerViewSuite opends logs access Refer to the OpenDS website for details on OpenDS access logs URL https docs opends org 2 2 page DefAccessLog As of February2012 06606060620092000000000900000009090909020000090090909090900000909090000000090909090000000909090990000009009909000000090909000000909299 Output format Audit logs are CSV files where the following items are output in the following order Output format operation date time user ID tenant name operation type operation information operation result operation date time tenant name operation type operation
205. lancer directly and delete the failed configuration such as load balancing rules 7 Take corrective action based on the check results if definitions have been modified When the network device administrator has not modified the configuration Extract the server load balancer definitions and check the content When inappropriate settings have been configured log in to the server load balancer directly and modify the definitions When a network device administrator has modified the configuration Check if the configuration modification is necessary When the configuration modification is not necessary The infrastructure administrator should log in to the server load balancer directly and delete or modify the problem causing configuration such as load balancing rules When configuration modifications were necessary based on the system operation policy Review if the details of scripts parameter files and interface configuration files are based on the operation policy 11 4 3 2 When a Changing State of Server Load Balancer is Detected during Status Confirmation Using the ROR Console Use the following procedure to confirm the status of server load balancers 1 Select the network device of the server load balancer on which an error has occurred from the network device tree 2 Select the Resource Details tab 3 Confirm the status of the server load balancer 4 Identify the L Platform in use a Confirm the name of the serve
206. late virtual L Server or physical L Server UsedFrequency This is the usage time 1 ItemAmount This is a breakdown of the amounts Format ZZZZZZZZZZZ9 2 Example 50 Data enclosed with double quotes 2 The amount is shown only without the currency symbol The following is an example of file output TenantName TenantDisplayName TenantDeletedDate LplatformId LplatformName LplatformDeleteDate Date C hargeAmount FileVersion ItemColumn1 ItemColumn2 ItemColumn3 ItemColumn4 UnitPrice UsedFrequency Item Amount TNT00001 tenant01 2012 02 01 09 30 40 001 TNT00002 LPlatform01 template TNT00002 LPlatformgl 2012 02 01 09 230 40 001 2012 02 1000 1 Q0 m mam mm mm wm mm mee ee mm mw nno o lemplateo U TE QI U X200 0000 month 1 month 290 wm mm mm n nw mn nm U Virtual server serverlId001 image001 31 2000 h Sh 6 Ww nm ww mn mw wm w Virtual server serverlId001 CPU VMPOOl Icore 10GHz 1 6667 0 5560 h 18h 26 me me nn n rr rri rr Virtua server serverId001 Memory capacity VMPool 10GB 20 0000 h 18h 360 n nn nn nr te rrr rr Virtua server serverId001 Disk Capacity StragePool 10GB 8 7500 h 18h 158 Wn mm mm mn mn wn mn n ULrtual server se rverld001 Disk C pacrty StragePool2 10GB 9 0000 h 2h 18 mown nn nrn n Virtua server serverId001 Disk Capacity St
207. lates to be disabled L Platform template name usage fee the estimated price start of applicable date etc 2 Disable the L Platform templates on the date that was notified Disable the L Platform templates using the template management window of the ROR Console Refer to 8 3 6 Publishing and Hiding L Platform Template in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE for information on the setting for disabling the L Platform template Check Metering Log 1 Check that the log that shows the usage result of the corresponding L Platform templates does not exist in the metering log Output the metering log by the output metering logs command to check that no resource identifiers corresponding to the category code of that accounting information and no information for the item ID corresponding to that exists in the metering log The correspondence relationships between category codes and resource identifiers in the accounting information and item IDs in the metering log are shown below Accounting information Resource identifier antes p base template id image name storage pool vm pool server pool 125 WENN menm mme m meme mmm Delete accounting information 1 Execute the output function of the product master maintenance command The accounting information of the L Platform templates registered on the product master will be output to the specified accounting information file by execu
208. lation This section explains the preparations for configuration of server switchover Use the following procedure for configuration 1 Register a server in a spare blade chassis in the server pool Perform one of the following steps Register a server in a spare blade chassis in the server pool Register a server in a spare chassis in the server pool for a spare server 2 Create an L Server For details refer to 16 1 Creation Using an L Server Template or 16 2 Creation of Physical L Servers Using Parameters in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE In this case perform redundancy for the L Server On the Server tab of the Create an L Server dialog set the following items Check the HA checkbox When the server in the chassis was registered in the spare server pool in step 1 specify the spare server pool Operations This section explains how to perform switchover of L Servers Use the following procedure to perform switchover of L Servers 1 A chassis error is detected If the following events occur determine whether to perform chassis switchover regarding the event as the chassis failure When both management blades cannot be accessed because of a management blade failure Communication with the admin LAN is not possible When communication is not possible because there is trouble with the LAN switches that connect with the admin LAN 2 Check the chassis on which the L Server
209. lation foldeNSVRORMManagerVeteWcustomize data Linux Manager etc opt FJS Vrcvmr customize data Definition File Name spare server config rcxprop 160 Definition File Format For the definition file write each line in the following format Key Value When adding comments start with a number sign Definition File Items Specify the following items in a definition file Table 17 1 List of Items Specified in Definition Files for Checking Spare Server Models and Configurations skip Configure the check policy of the L Server definition for the whole system and the spare server configuration warning skip Omits the check of whether or not there is a server that satisfies the spare server conditions Even if a server pool that does not satisfy the conditions is selected creation and modification of an L Server are performed without checking warning Server pools without servers that satisfy the spare server Policy of conditions are also displayed OVERALL POLICY A ENG Switchover When a server pool that does not satisfy the conditions is selected a warning message is displayed during creation and modification of an L Server checking whether to continue the operation error Server pools without servers that satisfy the spare server conditions are not displayed Therefore a server pool that does not satisfy the spare server conditions cannot be selected Server switchover is not possi
210. le Some L Platform Management Settings Tenant Management and Account Management Settings Operational Status Server List Settings CMDB Agent Event Log Output Settings Network device configuration file Online backup uses the PostgreSQL Point In Time Recovery PITR mechanism There are two online backup methods each with a different database collection range as follows Base Backup Base backup is the backup of the entire database cluster file group in which database data is recorded A base backup is taken by executing the rexmgrbackup base command Refer to Base Backup in 10 1 3 Online Backup of the Admin Server for details Differential Backup With differential backup the contents of updates to the database are output to multiple files in 16 MB sized lots These files are called Write Ahead Logging WAL files z73 Usually for each 16 MB written the WAL file being written to is switched and the WAL file for which writing has been completed is saved to the wal directory under the backup directory Periodically executing the rexmgrbackup command allows the contents of updates to the database that are recorded in saved WAL files to be maintained for a certain period of time For example when the rexmgrbackup command is executed every hour the contents of updates performed in the most recent one hour period will be saved Refer to Differential Backup in 10 1 3 Online Backup of the Admin Server for details
211. log 3 Output Destination The log output destinations are shown below Windows Manager Output folder Output destination file s audit log n n is the number of Installation_folde RCXCFMG logs vsys audit TOS n n is the number o generations Linux Manager Output folder Output destination file var opt FJS Vcfmg logs vsys_audit_log n n is the number of generations Output format Audit logs are CSV files where the following items are output in the following order Output format lt date time when the operation was performed gt lt user ID gt lt organization ID gt lt operation ID gt lt parameters gt lt operation result gt date time when the YYYY MM DD HH MM SS sss local time operation was performed 141 Item Description SUCCESS if the operation was successful and FAILURE if the operation failed Note The operation types are as follows Event notify Notifying events that occurred on a server With the current version changes to the power status migration reconfiguring pool information events are notified 142 V14 1 to an L Platform for this product VSYS flowEnableRelease Returning all L Platforms as a batch For flows operation to perform after authorization VSYS flowEnableUpdate Reconfiguring an L Platform For flows operation to perform after authorization VSYS flowError Executing post processing when an error has occurred with an appli
212. m deployed time Platforms L Server Virtual L Server Total number of deployed L Servers Deployment time of the L Server time Physical L Server CPU Operating time of the L Server CPU clock Use one of the following CPU performance GHz CPU reserved performance GHz Memory capacity Use one of the following Operating time of the L Server Memory GB Memory reserved GB Data disk capacity Disk size GB Disk deployment time Note This is the default value when overcommit is enabled on the virtual L Server These can be changed by changing the settings Point Usage Charges for physical L Servers The calculation of Usage Charges for the CPU CPU clock and memory capacity of the physical L Server are calculated using the values input into the L Platform Management window input value Also a server that is close to the input value in the specified server pool will be deployed as the physical L Server For that reason if charging for the physical L Server perform operations such as preparing multiple physical L Servers that are close to the input value in the server pool CPU usage charges The usage charge for the CPU is calculated based on the CPU and the CPU clock The calculation formula is as follows CPU unit price 60 minutes CPU clock unit price 60 minutes x CPU clock count 0 1 x CPU count x usage time 15 4 5 Example of Usage charge Calculation Here we will describe an exa
213. mal and the name is the same as the network device confirmed in 1 on which changing state has occurred the error will be identified as having occurred on the network device firewall Additionally confirm the status of the specified firewall For details on how to confirm the status of the firewall refer to 11 4 2 Firewall Status Confirmation Confirm Use Resource of the Server Load Balancer List When the status of a used resource is something other than normal and the name is the same as the network device confirmed in 1 on which changing state has occurred the error will be identified as having occurred on the network device server load balancer Additionally confirm the status of the specified server load balancer For details on how to confirm the status of the server load balancer refer to 11 4 3 Server Load Balancer Status Confirmation When the network device on which changing state occurs is something other than a firewall and a server load balancer a Confirm the name of the network resource The name of the network resource can be confirmed in the items of the displayed results of the rexadm netdevice show command AllocatedResources Network Specify the name of the network device confirmed in 1 for the name of the network device name for the name option Select the L Platform from the orchestration tree Select the L Server under the L Platform 100 d Select the Resource Details ta
214. management function these files are excluded from the scope of version management They are not automatically deleted master slot A slot that is recognized as a server when a server that occupies multiple slots is mounted member server A collective term that refers to a server in a Windows network domain that is not a domain controller migration The migration of a VM guest to a different VM host The following two types of migration are available Cold migration Migration of an inactive powered off VM guest Live migration Migration of an active powered on VM guest multi slot server A server that occupies multiple slots 195 NAS Network Attached Storage A collective term for storage that is directly connected to a LAN network device The unit used for registration of network devices L2 switches firewalls and server load balancers fit into this category network device configuration file These files contain definitions of settings regarding communication such as VLAN information for network devices and interfaces rules for firewalls and server load balancers etc As the content of these files changes each time settings are configured from the CLI they are the target of automatic backup by Resource Orchestrator and a constant number of versions 32 by default are backed up inside Resource Orchestrator Many network devices have two types of network device configuration files running config
215. mand Refer to 8 7 3 Metering Log Settings for information on the metering log operational settings file and refer to 10 1 ctchg chgschedule Change Periodic Log Schedule Settings in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for the Change periodic log schedule settings command 2 The periodic log for L Platform template is output for tenant specific templates The periodic log is not output for global templates amp Note Create processing for periodic logs and delete processing for metering logs are implemented periodically The processing results of create processing for periodic logs and delete processing for metering logs will be output to the following files as operation logs Create processing for periodic logs Windows Manager installation foldert NRCXCTMGNChargingMlogWMnetering period log Linux Manager var opt FJSVctchg log metering period log Delete processing for metering logs Windows Manager installation foldert NRCXCTMGNChargingNMlogWMmnetering log db delete log Linux Manager var opt FJSVctchg log metering log db delete log Refer to Chapter 14 Messages Starting with meter in the Messages to check whether processing is operating normally Check create processing for periodic logs every day at 0 00 or at least 5 minutes after the changed time Delete processing for metering logs is implemented at 0 35 every day so check at that time or later 066
216. mation stop the server and then delete the target CA settings set them as hyphens 2 Replace the Server Replace the HBA of the server Change the OBP settings of the replacement server to match the operating environment 56 For details on OBP settings refer to 8 2 Configure the Server Environment in the Design Guide CE Shut down the server after completing OBP settings When the target CA was deleted in step 1 configure zoning and host affinity settings in the WWPN value of the replacement HBA For details refer to the ESC users guide 3 Change the WWN Information Settings Change the WWN information settings for after server replacement to the WWN value of the HBA after server replacement When the target CA was deleted in step 1 configure a new target CA After configuration restart the server After starting the server check the status of the server s HBA from ESC When the HBA status is unknown delete it When the HBA status is displayed as access path inheritance is required yellow icon perform access path inheritance For details refer to the ESC users guide When the target CA was not deleted in step 1 configure the target CA as a hyphen For PRIMEQUEST Servers Replacing a Server Assigned with Spare Servers Use the following procedure to switch applications over to a spare server and replace a server with minimal interruption Perform Server Switchover Switch over the server
217. mation once the operation starts 8 7 3 Metering Log Settings This section explains how to change the metering log operational settings Follow the steps below to change the metering log operational settings 1 Open the following operational settings file for metering logs Windows Manager Installation folderNRCXCTMGNChargingNconfMmnetering log properties Linux Manager etc opt FJSVctchg conf metering log properties 36 2 Change the relevant items in the operational settings file for metering logs Key retention period periodic log use 1 periodic log schedule time 1 periodic log schedule type 1 periodic log schedule day 1 Retention period of log entries 0000 03 00 Logs will be deleted once their retention period has passed Use the following format to specify the retention period YYYY MM DD Example 0000 03 00 Retain logs for 3 months 0005 00 00 Retain logs for 5 years Specify whether or not to use the periodic log function yes yes Use no Do not use Output time of periodic log 00 00 Use the following format to specify the output time HH mm Output frequency of periodic log DAILY Specify one of the following strings DAILY Every day WEEKLY Every week MONTHLY Every month Output day of periodic log No specification If periodic log schedule type is WEEKLY or MONTHLY this item is mandatory 2 If periodic log schedule type is WEEKL
218. menus By convention procedures described in this manual only refer to pop up menus Regarding Installation Folder Paths The installation folder path may be given as C Fujitsu ROR in this manual Replace it as shown below When using Windows 64 bit x64 C Program Files x86 Resource Orchestrator When using Windows 32 bit x86 C Program Files Resource Orchestrator Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in this manual Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Standard Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Enterprise Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Standard Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Enterprise Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Datacenter Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Standard Edition Windows Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Microsoft R Windows Server R 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition Windows R 7 Professional Windows R 7 Ultimate Windows Vista R Business Windows Vista R Enterprise iv Windows Vista R Ultimate Microsoft R Windows R XP Professional operating system Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Standard Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Enterprise Windows Server 2008 Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Standard Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Enterprise Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 R2 Datacenter on Microsoft R Windows Server R 2008 Standard x86 Wind
219. messages can also be edited in the home window Refer to 3 2 Editing the Home Messages in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE for details Information are divided into those for infrastructure administrators and those for tenant administrators and tenant users so use the following respective text files to edit them For infrastructure administrators Windows Manager Installation folderNSVRORMManagerNetcNcustomize dataMhome tabMhome infra mes txt Linux Manager etc opt FJSVrcvmr customize data home tab home infra mes txt For tenant administrators and tenant users Windows Manager Installation folderNSVRORMManagerNetcNcustomize dataMhome tabMhome tenant mes txt Linux Manager etc opt FJSVrcvmr customize data home tab home tenant mes txt Settings Enter the message line by line in the following format date message UTF 8 must be used as the character code in the text file There is no schedule format specified If no schedule is required use a comma at the start of the line and then subsequently enter the message 25 Enter a string of up to 30 characters for the schedule Commas cannot be included Enter a string of up to 250 characters for the message Commas can be included Example of settings 2011 11 11 Maintenance is scheduled for the Kanto network on the weekend Upgraded the operation management software 8 5 Settings for L Plattorm Management This
220. min For details refer to the PRIMECLUSTER manual G amp Note 006062062000909209909000090909909909909000090929090200000090990909000009090990990909000909090909090000090909099090900009099990990000009999000090909299 When using ServerView Deployment Manager on an admin LAN all services related to Resource Orchestrator will be automatically disabled To prevent conflicts with ServerView Deployment Manager do not start these services in order For details refer to Appendix B Co Existence with ServerView Deployment Manager in the Setup Guide VE Resource Orchestrator cannot be operated if any of the manager services are stopped Ensure that all services are running when Resource Orchestrator is running If the manager is unable to communicate on the admin LAN when started up because of LAN cable disconnections or any other causes PXE Services may not start automatically If PXE Services are stopped investigate the network interface used for the admin LAN and confirm whether it can communicate with other nodes on the admin LAN If the manager cannot communicate with admin LAN nodes restore the admin LAN itself and restart the manager In Basic mode the following manager services are started In Basic mode the procedure to start and stop the services and the procedure to check their statuses are same as those in standard mode Windows Manager Manager Services Resource Coordinator Manager Resource Coordinator Task Manager
221. mize user rights according to the design changes made in 5 2 Customizing Access Authority for L Platform Operations in the Design Guide CE You can use a command to customize user rights Refer to Chapter 11 Access Authority Customize Commands in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on the command to customize user rights 8 6 Settings for Tenant Management and Account Management This section explains how to change the settings for the tenant management and the account management and explains how to edit the user agreement that is displayed when registering a user 30 8 6 1 Settings for Tenant Management and Account Management This section explains how to change the settings for the tenant management and the account management Display setting for user list This section explains the procedure for changing the setting for whether or not tenant users are to be displayed when an infrastructure administrators has used the tenant management to display the user list Setting for registration format of tenant users This section explains the procedure for changing the setting for whether a provisional account of a tenant user is to be registered or whether the tenant user is to be registered directly when a tenant administrator registers a tenant user Setting for execution authority of the tenant management This section explains the procedure for changing the setting for whether or not a tenant administrator can
222. mmand OpenDS Installation folder bin ldapmodify p port number f lt ldif file D administrator user DN w password An execution example is shown below opt fujitsu ServerViewSuite opends bin ldapmodify p 1473 D cn Directory Manager f tmp ldif adduser2group ldif w admin Processing MODIFY request for cn IflowUsers ou group dc fujitsu dc com MODIFY operation successful for DN cn IflowUsers ou group dc fujitsu dc com Note n the command input line enter the command as one line without entering any line feeds For the directory service port number administrator DN and administrator DN password enter the values that were set during installation 90606060606000009090990999099000000009090999090990009000000909090090900909000000090090909099990990000000090099090909000000000909999 For Active Directory 1 From the Start menu open Control Panel Administrative Tools Active Directory Users and Computers Select the name of a domain that is managed by Active Directory Right click IflowUsers of the organizational unit Group and select Property 2 3 4 5 6 Select the Members tab and select the members to delete from the member list and click the Remove button A confirmation dialog will be displayed Click Yes After returning to the property window of the group confirm that the members have been deleted correctly and click the OK button 8 2 Se
223. modify the accounting settings 8 7 1 Display Function Settings for Estimated Price Usage fee the estimated price for the L Platform template can be displayed in the L Platform Management window based on L Platform template accounting information This section describes how to modify settings according to whether usage fee the estimated price for the L Platform template will be displayed Point 00606060609290900000009099099090000900990909000009090929090900000909999090000090990999090000009099090000000999209000000999006000c99299 Display Function Settings for Estimated Price can be set by Setup Wizard on the ROR Console See the table below for the settings items can be set by Setup Wizard on the ROR Console For details of Setup Wizard refer to 3 1 Setup Wizard in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE Procedures to modify the settings are as follows 1 Open the following file Windows Manager Installation folderNRCXCFMGNconfigNvsys config xml Linux Manager 34 etc opt FJSVcfmg config vsys config xml 2 The following information must be modified use charge Specifies whether usage fee the estimated price for the L Platform template will be displayed yes Display no Do not display note this can be set by Setup Wizard on the ROR Console A setting example is shown below lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 lt DOCTYPE properties SYSTEM http
224. mple of calculation using an L Platform with the configuration shown below 128 Configuration L Platform1 L Platform1 Template ID TE 01 L Server1 Template ID TE 01 L Servert Add L Server Charge information The charge information is as follows Operation Operations on the L Platform are as follows 2012 07 01 10 10 00 2012 07 01 10 11 00 2012 07 02 18 10 00 2012 07 02 18 11 00 2012 07 02 18 12 00 2012 07 02 18 13 00 2012 07 05 18 00 00 2012 07 05 18 01 00 129 Usage time The usage time for is resource is as follows L Platform1 128 hours 51 minutes 7731 minutes L Serverl 128 hours 51 minutes 7731 128 hours 51 minutes 7731 minutes minutes L Server2 71 hours 50 minutes 4310 71 hours 48 minutes 4308 minutes minutes Extension disk 1 128 hours 51 minutes 7731 minutes Extension disk 2 71 hours 50 minutes 4310 minutes Usage charges The usage charges for L Platform 1 are as follows 130 Plat ormi usage charges Template L Serverl L Serer2 Usace charges 200 118 94 136 52 257 45 L Serverl ME or et 7734 1229 t beu vMPool 400m nur Fg E ee rr oe ice Usage char ge for CPU MM pool n3me junit price l nir Usage munt nit es OR GA OC xtension disk Prage poe namjoo arite linit fraes muot finit rag tases marz 0001 01GB hour scag 773 6443 Monthly usage charge for L Serverl L Server
225. n and spare server configuration are checked when configuring server redundancy during creation or modification of a physical L Server Confirmation is performed on the following items of an L Server definition and spare server configuration Server Model Check if there is a server compatible with the L Server definition in the specified server pool The compatibility of server models is evaluated by the definition file for checks on spare server models and configurations The definition file is created when installing managers When installing a new compatible server model update the definition file by adding the server model In the following cases the same server model of physical server as the server specified in the L Server definition is selected When there is no definition file When there is an error in definitions 159 Number of NICs Check the number of NICs mounted on a compatible server and L Server A server is considered as a server satisfying the conditions in the following cases The number of NICs mounted on the compatible server is the same as the number in the L Server definition The number is more than the number in the L Server definition Selection of Suitable Spare Servers When the Use a low spec server checkbox is not selected a spare server is automatically set Based on the following conditions an L Server definition is compared to physical L Servers existing in the specified resource pool as a sp
226. n procedure according to confirmed back up date When back up date of the latest network device configuration file is later a Restore network device environment file in rcxadm netdevice cfrestore command b Restore network device configuration file in rcxadm netdevice cfrestore command When back up date of network device environment file is later a Restore only network device environment file in rexadm netdevice cfrestore command B See 00606060620009209000000090090000009090909099090000909090909099090000909090909090000009009099090000009292090900000009099099000090929090900000909299 For details on the rexadm netdevice command refer to 3 8 rexadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 93 Part 4 Monitoring Chapter 11 Monitoring Resources Chapter 12 Collecting Power Consumption Data and Displaying Graphs Chapter 13 Monitoring Resource Pools Dashboard Chapter 14 Monitoring L Platforms Chapter 15 Accounting Chapter 16 Monitoring Logs 94 Chapter 11 Monitoring Resources This chapter explains how to monitor the configuration and status of managed resources 11 1 Overview Resource Orchestrator can centrally monitor the configuration and status of servers or other managed resources directly from the ROR console This enables the identification of resources experiencing problems which reduces the time spent on system maintenance Moreover Resource Orchestrator can easily launch external man
227. n the shared disk When there is no rcx base rcxprop file create one Drive nameVFujitsuuRORVSVROR customize dataWwcx base rcxprop Start the manager Linux Manager 1 2 4 5 Stop the manager Mount the shared disk of the admin server on the primary node or the secondary node Change the TASK WORKER COUNT values for rcx base rcxprop files in the shared disk When there is no rcx base rcxprop file create one Destination to mount shared disk Fujitsu ROR SVROR etc opt FJS Vrcvmr customize data rcx base rcxprop Unmount the shared disk for the admin server from the node mounted in step 2 Restart the manager For details on how to start and stop the manager refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager amp j Note 900606020909092909900900009990990900090990099099090000900909090909090000090999990900099909909090000009909990990999000099990900000999909900909099999 Advisory Notes for Basic Mode Memory usage will increase according to the multiplicity For details on the memory usage to increase refer to Table A 3 Increased Memory Use with Multiple Operations Calculate the memory used from a value in the table and the memory size required for the manager operations described in 2 4 2 6 Memory Size in the Design Guide CE and then add memory if necessary Table A 3 Increased Memory Use with Multiple Operations Multiplicity Increase in Memory Use Unit MB Ee 176 Multiplicity Increase in Mem
228. nd application of ICT within an organization or community ILOM Integrated Lights Out Manager The name of the Remote Management Controller for SPARC Enterprise T series servers image file A system image or a cloning image Also a collective term for them both infrastructure administrator A user who manages the resources comprising a data center infra admin is the role that corresponds to the users who manage resources Infrastructure administrators manage all of the resources comprising a resource pool the global pool and local pools provide tenant administrators with resources and review applications by tenant users to use resources integrated network device A network device with integrated firewall or server load balancing functions The IPCOM EX IN series fits into this category IPMI Intelligent Plattorm Management Interface IPMI is a set of common interfaces for the hardware that is used to monitor the physical conditions of servers such as temperature power voltage cooling fans power supply and chassis These functions provide information that enables system management recovery and asset management which in turn leads to reduction of overall TCO IQN iSCSI Qualified Name Unique names used for identifying iSCSI initiators and iSCSI targets iRMC integrated Remote Management Controller The name of the Remote Management Controller for Fujitsu s PRIMERGY servers iSCSI A standard for using the
229. nding on the authority level To change the configuration perform the following Configuration File Windows Manager Installation_folde SVROR Manager rails config rcx rcx_manager_params rb Linux Manager opt FJS Vrcvmr rails config rcx rcx manager params rb Configuration Parameters Table A 1 Configuration Parameters RESTART ENABLE Select the restart operation status true 174 When restarting Specify true When not restarting Specify false RESTART HOUR RESTART HOUR Specify the restart time hour from 0 to 23 RESTART MIN Specify the restart time minutes from 0 to 59 RESTART CYCLB Specify the restart interval days from 1 to 5 Parameter Change Procedure 1 Stop the manager 2 Use an editor and change the parameters of the rcx manager params rb file 3 Start the manager For details on how to start and stop the manager refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager amp Note The conditions for restarting are that more than RESTART CYCLE 24 hours have passed since manager was started and it is the time specified for RESTART HOUR and RESTART MIN For the stable operation of systems configure the restarting of managers to occur on a daily basis Changing Multiple Operations of Managers When executing multiple operations simultaneously the upper limit is set for the number of simultaneous operations The upper limit of the number of simultaneous operations can be chan
230. nformation 3 Confirm there are no differences besides the link information under Links tag regarding the added or modified destinations for connection by comparing the network configuration information of network devices registered in Resource Orchestrator and the network configuration information created in 2 If there is any difference check with the system administrator that network device configurations have not been modified and change the network configuration information if necessary The network configuration information of network devices registered in Resource Orchestrator can be obtained using the rexadm netconfig export command 4 Modify the network device by setting the confirmed network configuration information as the input information Use the rcxadm netdevice modify command to modify network devices 5 Confirm from the ROR console that the network device information has changed and the status is normal wA See For details on how to create network configuration information XML definition refer to 14 6 Network Configuration Information in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on the rcxadm netconfig command refer to 3 7 rcxadm netconfig in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on the rexadm netdevice command refer to 3 8 rexadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 9 6 Storage Device Maintenance This section explains how to maintain storage devices
231. ng HBA address rename there is no need to restore the boot disk Simply power on the replacement server Release Maintenance Mode Release the replaced server from maintenance mode For details on maintenance mode refer to Appendix C Maintenance Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE Servers with no Agent Registered Use the following procedure to replace servers on which no Resource Orchestrator agent was registered 1 Activate the Maintenance LED Activate the maintenance LED on the server that is to be replaced and shut down the server if it is still powered on For details on how to activate maintenance LEDs refer to 9 2 1 Maintenance LED Replace the Server Replace the server whose maintenance LED is activated Change the BIOS settings of the replacement server to match the operating environment 50 For details on BIOS settings refer to 8 2 Configure the Server Environment in the Design Guide CE Shut down the server after completing BIOS settings 3 Re configure Hardware Properties after Replacement After replacing the server re configure Resource Orchestrator with the latest hardware properties For details on how to re configure hardware properties refer to 9 3 1 Reconfiguration of Hardware Properties After hardware properties have been re configured the maintenance LED is automatically turned off in the ROR console 9 2 4 Replacing Non Server Hardwar
232. ng settings Example of the setting for product ID ME 0001 Product Priority Unit Start of applicable date End of applicable date ID price Data ME 0001 2 00 2012 01 01T00 00 00 000 0900 None A ME 0001 1 00 2012 08 01T00 00 00 00040900 2012 08 31T23 59 59 999 0900 B The unit price for product ID ME 0001 is 2 00 on 2011 07 01 because only data A is applied The unit price for product ID ME 0001 is 1 00 on 2011 08 15 because data B has higher priority even though both data A and data B are in the applicable period Anexample description of accounting information file ME 0001 0 2012 01 01T00 00 00 000 0900 memory VMPoo1l month 200 Standard memory Standard memory 119 ME 0001 1 2012 08 01T00 00 00 000 0900 2012 08 31T23 59 59 999 0900 memory VMPool month 100 Standard memory Campaign Standard memory Campaign 2 The value of the resource identifier can be obtained from the value of the corresponding XML tag of the template information list that is output in XML format by using the template information list display command Refer to 9 12 cfmg listtemplate Displaying Template Information List in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on how to use the template information list display command The resource identifier for each category code and the corresponding template information XML tag are shown below Resource identifiers an
233. ng two groups of Windows services Manager Services Resource Coordinator Manager Resource Coordinator Task Manager Resource Coordinator Web Server Apache Resource Orchestrator Sub Web Server Mongrel Resource Orchestrator Sub Web Server Mongrel2 Resource Coordinator Sub Web Server Mongrel3 Resource Coordinator Sub Web Server Mongrel4 Resource Coordinator Sub Web Server Mongrel5 Resource Coordinator DB Server PostgreSQL ServerView Resource Orchestrator Service Catalog Manager DB Service Dashboard ServerView Resource Orchestrator Service Catalog Manager DB Service Charging ServerView Resource Orchestrator Service Catalog Manager REST Service Charging Related Services Deployment Service TFTP Service PXE Services DHCP Server Systemwalker SQC DCM Interstage BPM Analytics eRule Engine EFServer Systemwalker MpJobsch9 Systemwalker MpMjes Systemwalker MpMjes9 Systemwalker Runbook Automation DB Service Shunsaku Conductor cmdbc Shunsaku Sorter cmdbo01 Note Required when managed servers belonging to different subnets from the admin server exist From the Windows Control Panel open Administrative Tools Then open the Services window to check the state of each service Services are started and stopped using the rcxmgrctl command start and stop subcommands Using this command manager services and related services can be started or stopped at the same time For details on the command refer t
234. nit code specified in the charge information the charging method and the calculation of a month s usage charges Unit codes charging method Usage charges for one month year Fixed charging Unit price 12 months Charge by amount Unit price 60 minutes x usage time minutes x amount used 127 Point The unit price unit code and 1 month s usage charges for each resource specified in the charge information are displayed as usage charge information for each month from the ROR console Accounting tab to Usage Charge Detail window Refer to 12 3 Usage Charge Detail in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE for information about the Usage Charge Detail window Also tenant administrators can refer to the same information Refer to 11 2 Usage Charge Detail in the User s Guide for Tenant Administrators CE for information about the Usage Charge Detail window viewable by tenant administrators 6060606000009090600000090909 99090900009090909905909000009009290900000009090900000000909090690900000090909909909000000909090909909000009090990000009999 15 4 4 Resource Usage Amounts and Times If charging by amount is to be used for resources the usage charge is determined by the amount of resources used and the time they are used for The following table shows the relationship between the product categories for each resource the amount of resources used and the usage L Template Total number of deployed L L Platfor
235. nition file as that for failover When changing the configuration after executing the failover script correct the replication definition file 167 11 12 13 Create the following scripts by executing the rcxstorage failback command failback script Physical L Server stopping script Physical L Server startup script For details on the rcxstorage command refer to 5 23 rcxstorage in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Create these scripts in units of operating storage These scripts can be created after executing the failover script and performing switchover to the standby storage unit These scripts are created based on the configuration information at the time which the command is executed When changing configurations create these scripts again Execute the rcxstorage command with the failback option when an operating and a standby storage unit are displayed in the storage tree These scripts cannot be created when the operation target storage unit is not displayed in the storage tree Execute the physical L Server stopping script on the server where the manager is being operated This operation stops the physical L Server targeted by the failback script To forcibly stop the server without shutting down the operating system running on the L Server specify the force option when executing the physical L Server stopping script If an error occurs during execution of the script contact Fujitsu technical staf
236. nts cannot be written Character string data are enclosed by double quotations When the double quotation is a character in a character string enter two double quotations to escape it Whena double quotation is set in a character string that is enclosed with double quotations the single double quotation will be ignored p Example When the following string is entered in the accounting information file the value will be aaaaa a aaaaa a When the following string is entered in the accounting information file the value will be aaaaaa aaa aaa Columns represented in an accounting information file are shown below Explanation 1 Product ID Specify 16 or less characters using alphanumeric characters _ underline or hyphen 2 Priority Specify the priority in a product Multiple unit prices can be specified in a product and the unit price with larger value has higher priority 1 The same priority cannot be set to the same product Specify the numerical value from 0 to 999 No Specify ID that identifies the product No No Yes No Register one product for each resource identifier Start of applicable date Specify start of applicable date Format YY Y Y MM DDThh mm ss SSSZ Example 2011 04 01T00 00 00 000 0900 End of applicable Specify end of applicable date date Format YY YY MM DDThh mm ss SSSZ Example 2012 03 31T23 59 59 999 0900 Specify the date prior to the start of applicable date
237. o When using a model for which sample scripts are not prepared or even when using a model which has been used in the system until now by configuring definitions using the different rules scripts Even when using a model for which sample scripts are prepared and when using a model with definitions configured using different rules scripts Note Details of sample scripts may be reviewed and modified When using rulesets modified from prepared sample scripts the modified details will be cleared by replacing the modified scripts with the sample scripts when updating sample scripts In order to prevent this type of problem when creating scripts by referring to sample scripts create the new rulesets after copying the rulesets of the sample script and perform necessary modifications 9 00606000000029099099099099000090909090990909000990900000090909909099090909090000000909090999099099099099000000909909099099099099090000000999999 7 Change all resources using the additional network devices It is necessary to add the information about uplink ports of the added chassis when adding a blade server Use the rexadm network modify command to modify a network resource 8 Register the added server as a resource in the necessary resource pool wA See 606060606200090920000000009009000009090990909000000909099099090000009099090000000909090909090000090909209900000099900000000990900006099299 For details on the initial configurations of
238. o 5 19 rcxmgrctl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE To start or stop a manager in a clustered configuration right click the manager application shown under the failover cluster manager tree and select either Bring this service or application online or Take this service or application offline Linux Manager The manager is made up of the following two groups of Linux services Manager Services rcvmr Manager services also include the following daemons rcxmanager rcxtaskmgr rcxmongrell rcxmongrel2 rcxmongrel3 rcxmongrel4 rcxmongrel5 rcxhttpd Database PostgreSQL rcxdb Related Services scwdepsvd scwpxesvd scwtftpd dhcpd Note Required when managed servers belonging to different subnets from the admin server exist The status of each of those services can be confirmed from the service command as shown below service rcvmr status RETURN service scwdepsvd status lt RETURN gt service scwpxesvd status lt RETURN gt service scwtftpd status lt RETURN gt service dhcpd status lt RETURN gt Services are started and stopped using the rcxmgrctl command start and stop subcommands Using this command manager services and related services can be started or stopped at the same time For details on the command refer to 5 19 rcxmgrctl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE To start or stop a manager in a clustered configuration use the cluster administration view Cluster Ad
239. o view and modify the information of logged in users use Account on the ROR console for the operation For details on Account refer to Chapter 13 Account in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE ll Chapter 4 Managing Tenants This chapter explains the management of tenants Tenant Creation The flow of tenant creation is as follows 1 Register Tenants Input the tenant information and register tenants 2 Create a Tenant Administrator Create a tenant administrator 3 Create a Local Pool for Tenants The following two types of resource pool operations can be performed Local Pool A resource pool which can be used only for tenants A resource stored in a local pool cannot be used by a user of another tenant Global Pool A common resource pool which can be used by the entire system For details on how to select resource pools refer to Chapter 6 Defining Tenants and Resource Pools in the Design Guide CE When using a local pool create a local pool used only by the tenant registered in step 1 4 Register Resources Register the resources created in 3 in the local pool For details refer to 11 3 Creating a Tenant in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE Tenant Operation Use the Tenant tab in the ROR console for the following operations For details on the Tenant tab refer to Chapter 11 Tenant in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE Register T
240. oadcom Advanced Server Program LAN redundancy software that creates teams of multiple NICs and provides functions such as load balancing and failover blade server A compact server device with a thin chassis that can contain multiple server blades and has low power consumption As well as server blades LAN switch blades management blades and other components used by multiple server blades can be mounted inside the chassis blade type A server blade type Used to distinguish the number of server slots used and servers located in different positions BladeViewer A GUI that displays the status of blade servers in a style similar to a physical view and enables intuitive operation BladeViewer can also be used for state monitoring and operation of resources BMC Baseboard Management Controller A Remote Management Controller used for remote operation of servers boot agent An OS for disk access that is distributed from the manager to managed servers in order to boot them when the network is started during image operations CA Channel Adapter An adapter card that is used as the interface for server HBAs and fibre channel switches and is mounted on storage devices CCM ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager Copy Control Module This is a module that does not require installation of the ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager agent on the server that is the source of the backup but rather uses the advanced copy feature of the ETERNUS di
241. of Other Network DGNRIBE ausser atr titre rtr trae rtp EHE REO CD teinte ea 107 1 Montonne rr Nd 107 Chapter 12 Collecting Power Consumption Data and Displaying Graphs eseseseeeeneeenenenennenennenenn 109 DM AGRI M 12 2 Exporting Power Consumption Data 12 3 Power Consumption Data Pile CSV Format ncn ceciecie tette eee nt er DENN EEEE EERS ae niei inae ERER ER REEERE pape ed 109 12 4 Displaying Power Consumption Data Crapilis o cere tco etot rir trt rie erronee ert eee eerie edit ie bit proe 110 Chapter 13 Monitoring Resource Pools IDashboSId eiie meer ttr uaiiie ct tincnt ete rient eater 111 Chapter 14 Monitoring PPT TNS og cose 2c cenctes antcm etx stir etae prex scettur tere to ania Rip Ld DEpe uni satentasgite RPc2 IRR dnce gece 112 Chapter 15 Accounting SES a EE 15 2 Manage Acconntine IOPGETOSDOR o ree nen ertet tret t eater erect nro rl o ee E re ee ERR HER TEE 114 15 2 1 Doroonadon Mamipoued by Produet MBIIGE eere etr tera ac t hh tn eere e t at eO reb teas 115 13 2 2 Accounting Infprrhation File Forat si 2 x ieri de terere HER e SEEEN EP ERNE EEEE Sa STEE CR C ERES EsTe TES 118 15 3 Opetete Accomitn Tin eT AUR af oir etre tene ette rtr e tt neret REC E Hore AN De o EAEE 121 15 5 1 Register Accounting DIPOCIIAlQEL 2250 2 eese rrr tereti er bre tette eit KEEA ner ae Ho le EUER serito EN k ael 122 15 3 2 Modify Accounting Information Command
242. of relationships between virtual L Server NICs and physical server NICs operating on VM hosts can be performed using an operation similar to the connection of a normal LAN switch VLAN Virtual LAN A splitting function which enables the creation of virtual LANs seen as differing logically by software by grouping ports on a LAN switch Using a Virtual LAN network configuration can be performed freely without the need for modification of the physical network configuration VLAN ID A number between 1 and 4 095 used to identify VLANs Null values are reserved for priority tagged frames and 4 096 FFF in hexadecimal is reserved for mounting VM Virtual Machine A virtual computer that operates on a VM host VM guest A virtual server that operates on a VM host or an OS that is operated on a virtual machine 203 VM Home Position The VM host that is home to VM guests VM host A server on which server virtualization software is operated or the server virtualization software itself VM maintenance mode One of the settings of server virtualization software that enables maintenance of VM hosts Forexample when using high availability functions such as VMware HA of server virtualization software by setting VM maintenance mode it is possible to prevent the moving of VM guests on VM hosts undergoing maintenance For details refer to the manuals of the server virtualization software being used VM management software
243. on how to operate the accounting information 3 The infrastructure administrator publishes the L Platform template Create tenant 4 The infrastructure administrator creates tenants Set the cut off date for the calculation of usage charges and the email address to send them to as necessary Operation in the tenant 5 The subscriber references the usage fee the estimated price of the L Platform templates displayed on the L Platform management window and subscribes to the L Platform 6 The tenant administrator references to the usage fee the estimated price of the L Platform templates displayed in the Request on the ROR Console then approves or rejects the subscription 7 The infrastructure administrator views the monthly estimated charges for L Platform templates displayed in the Request in the ROR console and assesses the L Platform subscriptions Invoice for usage charges 8 The accounts manager receives the usage charge file Usage charges are automatically calculated based on the amount that each L Platform is used and the charge information then stored in the usage charge database The usage charges for the previous month are confirmed the day after the cut off date and then sent as a usage charge file to the email address 9 The accounts manager views the usage charge file creates the invoice and then sends it to the tenant View usage charges 10 The infrastructure administrator and the tenant administrator
244. on of admin servers 2 2 OS administrative privileges are necessary for OS maintenance and backup and restore of admin servers Infrastructure Administrator infra admin Monitoring Operations Monitoring operations that infrastructure administrators infra admin can perform are as follow Monitoring of resource pools using dashboard Monitoring of L Platform operation statuses Monitoring of resource capacity servers storage and network Monitoring of operation logs and audit logs 1 2 Operation Maintenance and Monitoring by Tenant Administrators For details on operations maintenance and monitoring by tenant administrators refer to the User s Guide for Tenant Administrators CE 1 3 Operation Maintenance and Monitoring by Tenant Users For details on operations maintenance and monitoring by tenant users refer to the User s Guide for Tenant Users CE Part 2 Operation Chapter 2 Starting and Stopping Managers and Agents Chapter 3 Managing User Accounts Chapter 4 Managing Tenants Chapter 5 Managing Templates Chapter 6 Managing Resources and Resource Pools Chapter 7 Management of L Platform Chapter 8 Changing Settings Chapter 2 Starting and Stopping Managers and Agents This chapter explains how to manually start or stop managers and agents To use Resource Orchestrator both the manager and agents must be running The manager and agent services are configured to start automatically upon startup of t
245. onment that has been prepared in a global zone Its OS kernel is shared with the global zone Non global zones are completely separate from each other OS The OS used by an operating server a physical OS or VM guest overcommit A function to virtually allocate more resources than the actual amount of resources CPUs and memory of a server This function is used to enable allocation of more disk resources than are mounted in the target server 196 PDU Power Distribution Unit A device for distributing power such as a power strip Resource Orchestrator uses PDUs with current value display functions as Power monitoring devices physical LAN segment A physical LAN that servers are connected to Servers are connected to multiple physical LAN segments that are divided based on their purpose public LANs backup LANS etc Physical LAN segments can be divided into multiple network segments using VLAN technology physical network adapter An adapter such as a LAN to connect physical servers or VM hosts to a network physical OS An OS that operates directly on a physical server without the use of server virtualization software physical server The same as a server Used when it is necessary to distinguish actual servers from virtual servers pin group This is a group set with the end host mode that has at least one uplink port and at least one downlink port Pool Master On Citrix XenServer it indicates one V
246. operations such as regular maintenance or patch application For details on the maintenance of managed servers refer to the following sections 9 2 Blade Server Maintenance 0 3 Maintenance for Servers Other Than Blade Servers 9 4 For Servers not Using Server Management Software For details on the maintenance of network devices refer to the following section 9 5 Network Device Maintenance 5 Release Maintenance Status The infrastructure administrator releases the resource from maintenance mode When the maintenance target is a managed server When using physical L Servers The infrastructure administrator releases the physical L Servers from maintenance mode For details on maintenance mode refer to Appendix C Maintenance Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE When using a server for which spare servers are not configured When using a server for which spare servers are not configured the infrastructure administrator releases the managed server from maintenance mode For details on maintenance mode refer to Appendix C Maintenance Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE When the maintenance target is a network device The infrastructure administrator adds the network device as the target of monitoring or auto configuration by releasing it from maintenance mode For details refer to Chapter 22 1 Switchover of Maintenan
247. operties to open the Properties dialog 86 n Nn Open the Triggers tab select the existing trigger and click the Edit button ON Check the task every checkbox in Advanced settings and select 1 hour set by default I For the for a duration of select 1 day set by default 18 Click the OK button 10 1 4 Restoring the Admin Server This chapter describes how to restore resources that have been backed up Stop the manager Restore the resources of the Manager Start the manager Bopp P Update the configuration information in the operational status information 10 1 4 1 Stopping the Manager Execute the command shown below to stop the Manager For details on the command refer to 5 19 rcxmgrctl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Windows Manager Installation folderNSVRORMManagerMbinNrexmgrctl stop RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrcvmr bin rcxmgrctl stop RETURN 10 1 4 2 Restoring the Resources of This Product Restore the resources of this product Execute the command shown below For details on the command refer to 6 17 rcxmgrrestore in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Windows Manager gt Installation_folder SVROR Manager bin rcxmgrrestore dir directory RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrcvmr bin rcxmgrrestore dir directory RETURN When the management function for Network device configuration file is used and the folder i
248. option that provides the function for remote switchover of servers or storage in order to perform disaster recovery Dual Role Administrators The administrators with both infrastructure administrator s and tenant administrator s role dynamic LUN mirroring This is a feature whereby a mirror volume is generated at the remote site when a volume is generated at the local site and copies are maintained by performing REC dynamic memory A function that optimizes physical memory allocation for virtual machines depending on their execution status on Hyper V end host mode This is a mode where the uplink port that can communicate with a downlink port is fixed at one and communication between uplink ports is blocked environmental data Measured data regarding the external environments of servers managed using Resource Orchestrator Measured data includes power data collected from power monitoring targets 190 ESC ETERNUS SF Storage Cruiser Software that supports stable operation of multi vendor storage system environments involving SAN DAS or NAS Provides configuration management relation management trouble management and performance management functions to integrate storage related resources such as ETERNUS ETERNUS SF AdvancedCopy Manager This is storage management software that makes highly reliable and rapid backups restorations and replications using the advanced copy feature of the ETERNUS disk array Express The
249. ors tenant directory service can be performed and administrator and tenant password modification is to be allowed user operation when the tenant management is to be used to register a user and specify false if no user registration to directory service is to be performed and no password modification is to be allowed The initial value is true 33 If false has been specified the Set password button will not be displayed in the User List window of the tenant management In addition the Change user password button will not be displayed in the Account window of the account management Note that if false is specified users must already be registered in the directory service Perform user registration according to the directory service to be used note this can be set by Setup Wizard on the ROR Console Edit only the directory service line in the definition file A setting example is shown below directory service true Starting the manager Start the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to start the manager 8 6 2 Editing the User Agreement when Registering a User Refer to 19 13 Editing the User Agreement when Registering a User in the Setup Guide CE for information on how to edit the agreement displayed in the Registering Users window when new tenant users perform the registration procedure 8 7 Accounting Settings This section explains how to
250. ory Use Unit MB 15 30 2104 Multiplicity 40 M rr Appendix B Metering Log This chapter explains the metering log Metering logs is saved in the database as Information based on bill calculations so that fees can be charged based on the resources that have been used by tenants The Output metering log command is used to output metering logs to metering log files Refer to 10 2 ctchg getmeterlog Output Metering Logs in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on the Output metering log command wA See 006060606009090909000600009099000090090990990900000909909090009099099099290990900009099090000009299909090000009992909000000099090000060929299 Refer to Chapter 15 Accounting for information on the overview of the accounting the accounting information and the calculation of usage charges B 1 Types of Metering Logs There are two types of metering logs event logs and periodic logs Each of these types of logs is explained below Event logs Event logs are logs that are output when the status of a resource has changed such as when an L Platform is created or canceled or when an L Server is started or stopped An event log records resource attribute information such as the date and time at which the event occurred event type information for identifying the resource and allocation amount The following table shows the timing at which event logs will be output Adding When a resource is added and w
251. ot be the same as one used for an extension disk For operations that use separate storage pools charges for the existing disk can be calculated using the following two methods 115 If charging according to the total capacity of an existing disk attached to L Server s In the storage pool set the amount to be charged in units of 0 1GB when attaching an existing disk to an L Server If the same existing disk is attached to multiple different L Servers at this time the disk capacity will be added together for the total number of attached L Servers and charged accordingly If charging by the available existing disk from the L Platform Rather than setting the price for the existing disk defined by the storage pool perform settings instead to include the usage charge for the available existing disk in the price for the L Platform template Point L Platform operation when reconfiguration is not permitted L Servers and others will be allocated using the system configuration defined in the template if the L Platform template reconfiguration is not permitted in the operation In this case only the prices for the templates need to be set and the prices for the L Servers need not About Setting Prices In the Solaris container although it is possible to allocate more CPU and memory to the non global zone than is installed in the host operating system if the CPU load and memory usage in each non global zone increase the allocated CPU f
252. oupA 2 Voss Completed BX620 1 48 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 Servers migrate 2011 03 00 01 09 296 userA groupA 2 sie Starting BX620 1 50 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 Servers update 2011 03 00 02 58 125 userA groupA 27 0 0 Completed BX620 1 50 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 Servers update 2011 03 00 04 42 640 userA groupA 21 0 0 Starting BX620 1 57 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 l servers destroy 2011 03 00 05 22 921 userA groupA 27 0 0 Completed BX620 1 57 BX620 1 806 LS RT A001 Servers destroy 2011 03 00 35 44 250 userA groupA 2E S050 Starting BX620 1 117 BX620 1 954 LS RT A001 folders move resource 2011 03 00 35 44 625 userA groupA 2 010 Completed BX620 1 117 BX620 1 954 LS RT A001 folders move resource 2011 03 01 04 34 880 admin 0 20 30 53 Starting BX620 1 570 BX620 1 2193 master 52 l servers convert 2011 03 01 04 36 650 admin 04 20 3053 Completed BX620 1 570 BX620 1 2193 master 52 l servers convert 2011 03 01 05 05 568 admin 0420 30 53 Starting BX620 1 571 BX620 1 2193 master 52 l servers revert 2011 03 01 05 06 451 admin 04 520 30 53 Completed BX620 1 571 BX620 1 2193 master 52 l servers revert 00606060620009090000000909820900009090909090990900000090990909090000090909090909900000909099090000009292090900000009090990000900920090006000909299 amp Note The starting point Starting of recording for each operation is when the operation is displayed in the Recent Operations on the ROR
253. p Note If takeover was performed before replacement of the HBA release the spare server settings Change the WWN information settings following the procedure in Replacing a server with no spare server assigned When not Replacing an HBA 1 Perform Server Switchover Switch over the server to replace with its spare server For server switchover refer to Chapter 4 Server Switchover in the Operation Guide VE The server to replace is automatically powered off after switchover 2 Replace the Server Replace components other than the HBA of the server Change the OBP settings of the replacement server to match the operating environment For details on OBP settings refer to 8 2 Configure the Server Environment in the Design Guide CE Shut down the server after completing OBP settings Configure the remote management controller of the replacement server with the same IP address user name password and SNMP trap destination as those set on the original server 3 Perform Post server Switchover Operations For details on the operations that must be performed after server switchover refer to 4 3 Post Switchover Operations in the Operation Guide VE Replacing a Server with no Spare Server Assigned When WWN information has been configured use the following procedure to change the WWN information to that of the WWPN value of the replaced HBA 1 Delete the Target CA When there are target CA settings in the WWN infor
254. p Guide CE for information on the email settings used for the usage charge calculator Email Sent via an Application Process An email will be sent via the application process when changes or requests have been made The following notification will be sent for an application to use L Platform an L Platform modification or an application to cancel L Platform from the L Platform management window Notification of acceptance of application rejection of application and dismissal of application to the tenant users Notification of request for approval and dismissal of application to the tenant administrators Notification of request for assessment to the infrastructure administrators Refer to 19 1 6 Settings for Email Sent via the Application Process in the Setup Guide CE for information on how to change settings for email sent from an application process Settings for the Email Sent from the Dashboard Email sent from the Dashboard will be enabled only if using the dashboard alert function The dashboard sends notifications to e mail address setting in Customizing Email Send Settings if the global pool use rate exceeds the threshold value Refer to 19 1 7 Settings for Email Sent from the Dashboard in the Setup Guide CE for information on how to set settings for email sent from the dashboard alert function 8 3 Settings for Port Number of Management Servers This section explains how to change the port number of the Management Se
255. paces When the management function for Network device configuration file is used after offline backup is performed save the following folders and files under that folder Windows Manager Installation foldeNSVRORMManager WwarWetdevicel Linux Manager varlopt FJS Vrcvmr netdevice When the management function for Network device configuration file is used before restoration of admin server is performed replace the folder saved when backing up with the original folder Resources Managed by This Product and Timing of Update The resource files managed by Resource Orchestrator are as shown below When an operation described in the timing of update column has been performed a backup should be made Table 10 1 Resources to be Backed Up and Timing of Update Necessity of Target Resources When Backup is Necessary Stopping Remarks Managers After password saving after Session encryption keys execution of the rcxlogin save YP y 8 pees command Backup of system images and cloning images of virtual L Servers are performed as a part of After addition deletion and Not virtual machine backup System images and cloning images modification of Physical L Server Required operations images Perform backup operations of virtual machines using the corresponding functions of VM management software After creation registration Not Configuration definition information modification unregistration and Reouired equire deletion
256. pecified 1 Example param name MaxBackupIndex value 50 gt Do not specify decimal fractions Also do not leave a blank space 2 Do not specify a maximum file size that is larger than the size of the disk Conversely do not set values that are too small for the maximum file size or else the logs will be overwritten frequently 3 Start the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to start the manager Operation types and operation information The following table shows the operation types and operation information that are output to audit logs Function Operation type Operation information 1 Tenant management GUI registUser Notify user mail xxx com registration createUser Create users userid lt user ID of the user created amp mailz xxx 9 com operations P amp lastname lt ast name gt amp firstname lt first name gt from the aa ROR amp authz tenant adminltenant operatorltenant monitorl C i tenant_user onsole amp explanationz xxxx amp corporatename fujitsu amp emergencymailz yyy 9 com amp emergencytelz 0000 149 Operation type Operation information 1 only if the infrastructure administrator performed or the tenant administrator performed by the direct registration method deleteUser userid lt user ID of the user deleted updateUser Update user useridz user
257. perform the following tenant management Add users Delete users Delegate user privileges Set user password Password change notification email settings This section explains the procedure for modifying the settings when determining whether or not to include a new password within the body of the password change notification email that is sent once password settings are complete in the event that a tenant administrator sets the user s password Setting for execution authority of the account management This section explains the procedure for changing the setting for whether or not a tenant administrator or tenant user can perform the following account management Changing the user s own information Changing the user s own password Directory service operation setting This section explains the procedure for changing the setting for whether or not registration to directory service can be performed and for whether or not password modification is to be allowed when an infrastructure administrators or a tenant administrator registers a user Point Setting for registration format of tenant users and Setting for execution authority of the tenant management can be set by Setup Wizard on the ROR Console See the table below for the settings items can be set by Setup Wizard on the ROR Console For details of Setup Wizard refer to 3 1 Setup Wizard in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE 60606060620
258. pool A resource pool that contains resources that can be used by multiple tenants It is located in a different location from the tenants By configuring a global pool with the attributes of a tenant it becomes possible for tenant administrators to use the pool 191 global zone The actual OS that is used for a Solaris container A Solaris environment that has been installed on a physical server GLS Global Link Services Fujitsu network control software that enables high availability networks through the redundancy of network transmission channels GSPB Giga LAN SAS and PCI Box Interface Board A board which mounts onboard I O for two partitions and a PCIe PCI Express interface for a PCI box GUI Graphical User Interface A user interface that displays pictures and icons pictographic characters enabling intuitive and easily understandable operation HA High Availability The concept of using redundant resources to prevent suspension of system operations due to single problems hardware initiator A controller which issues SCSI commands to request processes In iSCSI configurations NICs fit into this category hardware maintenance mode In the maintenance mode of PRIMEQUEST servers a state other than Hot System Maintenance HBA Host Bus Adapter An adapter for connecting servers and peripheral devices Mainly used to refer to the FC HBAs used for connecting storage devices using Fibre Channel technology
259. pplication information etc opt FJS Vswrbam var opt FJSVswrbam var opt FISVJMCMN etc var opt FJSV jmcal var opt FISVJOBSC var opt FJS Vfwseo config JM lop FJSVJOBSC bin etc mjes E a E Target Resources Disk Space Necessary for the Backup Note The backup of metering information is gathered under the control of the directory specified by the rexmgrbackup command at an off line backup and it is gathered in the area besides the specified directory at an online backup Please calculate a necessary amount of disk by backing up metering information referring to the following examples The amount of disk space necessary for the base backup is necessary for an off line backup It is necessary to total the Disk space necessary for base backup and the Disk space necessary for difference backup for an online backup In the following conditions the amount of disk of about 12 6 GB is necessary for about 1 3 GB and online backups for an off line backup Table 10 3 Condition Necessary for Backup of Metering Information Number of operating L Platforms 1000 Number of L Platform The following operations are executed every day Return and deployment of 10 L Platforms Starting of 1 000 L Servers when starting operations Usage status Stopping of 1 000 L Servers when finishing operations A regular log is acquired every day Keep metering logs for one year Execute monthly base backup every 30 days Online b
260. processing to normal status In this case to restore forcibly log on from ETERNUSmgr then log off In the case of ETERNUS DX60 DX80 DX90 contact Fujitsu technical staff For details on how to restore ETERNUS refer to the ETERNUS manual 172 Chapter 18 Disaster Recovery This chapter provides information on Disaster Recovery for the admin server where Resource Orchestrator manager operates Resource Orchestrator provides simple and highly reliable Disaster Recovery through exporting and importing the following information that Resource Orchestrator manager handles L Platform Templates L Platform Configuration Information Resource Information Accounting Information Metering Logs For details refer to DR Option Instruction c APR Appendix A Notes on Operating ServerView Resource Orchestrator This appendix provides important reminders for the operation of Resource Orchestrator Redundancy Configurations for the Admin LAN If communication issues occur on the admin LAN or one of the network interfaces used by a managed server on the admin LAN fails the following operations may result in errors In such cases restore the admin LAN network as quickly as possible Backup and restore operations Collection and deployment of cloning images Server switchover and failback HBA address rename With Resource Orchestrator the factory set WWN of a managed server s HBA is overridden when the HBA address
261. pt When operating an L Platform use the cfmg_syncdiskinfo command to reflect the information for switched disks on the L Platform configuration information Windows Manager gt Installation_folde RCXCFMG bin cfmg_syncdiskinfo lt RETURN gt Linux Manager opt FJSVcfmg bin cfmg syncdiskinfo lt RETURN gt For details on the cfmg syncdiskinfo command refer to 12 7 cfmg_syncdiskinfo disk information synchronization in the Reference Guide Command XML CE When Performing Switchover from Standby to Operating Failback This section explains the procedure for performing switchover from standby storage units to operating storage units l 2 Request repair of the operating storage units Using storage management software restore the logical configuration RAID LUN of an operating storage unit Using storage management software check the LUN masking definition and LUN mapping definition of the operating storage unit If the definitions relating to the WWPN of the HBA of the physical L Server remain delete them A Information When the storage is ETERNUS delete the affinity group for the LUN of the operating storage unit By modifying the settings of the replication function perform replication of the storage unit from the operating to the standby then wait until the status of the LUNs of the operating and standby storage become equivalent Prepare the replication definition file Use the same replication defi
262. r and that the L Server can be accessed from the public LAN When a firewall has not been configured configure one If there are no problems in the communication check proceed to the next step If there are problems resolve them and check communication again 8 Configure server load balancers When an L Platform has a server load balancer deployed the tenant user performs configuration of the server load balancer 9 Check communication with server load balancers When an L Platform has a server load balancer deployed test that the settings of the server load balancer are correct It is necessary to configure the rules for the firewall so that communication using the virtual IP address configured for the server load balancer is possible If there are no problems in the communication check proceed to the next step If there are problems resolve them and check communication again 10 Configure firewalls Configure address translation and firewall rules and then test that communication with the L Server is possible If the test shows no problems configuration of the L Platform operation environment is complete If there are problems resolve them and check communication again 1 1 Operation Maintenance and Monitoring by Infrastructure Administrators This section explains operation maintenance and monitoring by infrastructure administrators when using Resource Orchestrator Infrastructure Administrator infra admin Operations R
263. r ServerView Operations Manager which is mandatory software Refer to a ServerView Operations Manager manual for details Backup Operations Perform system backup in accordance with Management Server system backup operations When a registration or update of user information has occurred perform backup again Restoration Operations a Perform restoration of the entire Management Server system b Use the restoration procedure described in this document to perform restoration If systems backed up using offline and online backup are to be restored perform restoration in the following order 1 Restoration of systems backed up using offline backup 2 Restoration of systems backed up using online backup When moving backup resources move the folder specified in the backup destination as well as all folders and files under that folder 74 Do not delete backup resources during execution of the restore command To delete backup resources delete the folder specified in the backup destination as well as all folders and files under that folder Backup to the following media cannot be performed using the backup command Backup to optical disks such as CD R and DVD R To back up user resources to optical disks back up once to local disks and then write to the media Backup to folders that include spaces Restoration from the following folders cannot be performed using the restore command Restoration from folders that include s
264. r details on BIOS settings refer to 8 2 Configure the Server Environment in the Design Guide CE Shut down the server after completing BIOS settings Configure the remote management controller of the replacement server with the same IP address user name password and SNMP trap destination as those set on the original server 3 Re configure Hardware Properties after Replacement After replacing the server re configure Resource Orchestrator with the latest hardware properties For details on how to re configure hardware properties refer to 9 3 1 Reconfiguration of Hardware Properties 4 Perform Post server Switchover Operations For details on the operations that must be performed after server switchover refer to 4 3 Post Switchover Operations in the Operation Guide VE Replacing a Server with no Spare Server Assigned Use the following procedure to smoothly replace a server and resume its applications Place the Server into Maintenance Mode Place the primary server to replace into maintenance mode For details on maintenance mode refer to Appendix C Maintenance Mode in the Users Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE 2 Create a System Image Backup For local boot servers create a system image backup when possible For details on backing up system images refer to Chapter 16 Backup and Restore in the User s Guide VE In SAN boot environments the boot disk can be restored without havin
265. r load balancer allocated using auto configuration by checking the items displayed in the results for the rexadm netdevice show command AllocatedResources SLB 105 b Confirm the name of the L Platform using the server load balancer by checking the items in results displayed for the rcxadm slb show command L Platform Name Specify the server load balancer name confirmed in a as the server load balancer name to be specified for the name option 5 For the confirmation procedure after this refer to the operation after step 3 of 11 4 3 1 When an L Platform Using a Server Load Balancer is Identified WS See For details on server load balancer operations login status confirmation definition extraction definition modification etc refer to the manuals of server load balancers For details on the rexadm netdevice command refer to 3 8 rcxadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on the rexadm slb command refer to 3 12 rcxadm slb in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 06060606000909000000009900600000909090909000000900909909000000909090909000090909009000000009099000000099900000009090090000099299 11 4 4 L2 Switch Status Confirmation This section explains the confirmation procedure of L2 switch status Use the following procedure to confirm the status of the L2 switch 1 Select the network device on which the status icon has changed from normal to another using the network device tree
266. ragePool3 10GB 9 7230 h 6h 59 mown nn nn an ome ome virtual server serverId003 image003 1 2000 h 5h 6 wnonw un en ne rr r Virtual server serverId003 CPU VMPool lcore 10GHz 1 6667 0 5560 h 18h 26 mown nn nn anon ome virtual server serverId003 Memory capacity VMPool 10GB 20 0000 bh 18h 360 moun nn nn anon ome virtual server serverId003 Disk Capacity StragePool 10GB 8 7500 h 18h 158 mw mm mm mm mm wm mnm n rr Virtual server serverId003 Disk Capacity StragePool2 10GB 9 0000 h 2h 18 mw mm mm mm mm wm mm mw Virtual server serverId003 Disk Capacity StragePool3 10GB 9 7230 h 6h 59 un nn nn nn nn un nn wm Physical server serverId002 o image002 n 1 2000 h 5h 6 mw mm mm mm mm wm mnm o p rr hysical server serverId002 CPU ServerPool 1core 10GHz N1 6667 N0 5560 h 18h 26 mw mm mm mm mm wm mm o p rr hysical server serverId002 Memory capacity ServerPool 10GB X20 0000 h 18n 360 mw nm mm n mw wm nm o p rr hysical server serverId002 Disk Capacity StragePool 10GB 8 7500 h 18h 158 mw mm mm mm mm wm owe o p rr hysical server serverId002 Disk Capacity StragePool2 10GB X9 0000 h 2h 18 mw mm mm mm mm wm mm o p rr hysical
267. rator The administrator who manages the entire system They perform pre configuration and installation of Resource Orchestrator Administrator privileges for the operating system are required Normally the roles of the infrastructure administrator and system administrator are performed concurrently 201 System Board A board which can mount up to 2 Xeon CPUs and 32 DIMMs system disk The disk on which the programs such as the OS and files necessary for the basic functions of servers including booting are installed system image A copy of the contents of a system disk made as a backup Different from a cloning image as changes are not made to the server specific information contained on system disks tenant A unit for the division and segregation of management and operation of resources based on organizations or operations tenant administrator A user who manages the resources allocated to a tenant tenant admin is the role for performing management of resources allocated to a tenant Tenant administrators manage the available space on resources in the local pools of tenants and approve or reject applications by tenant users to use resources tenant user A user who uses the resources of a tenant or creates and manages L Platforms or a role with the same purpose Thick Provisioning Allocation of the actual requested capacity when allocating storage resources Thin Provisioning Allocating of only the capacity
268. rder to store the resources When restoration is to be performed restoration occurs from the information in the latest folder of each folder Therefore even if a folder is deleted due to the disk capacity status this will not cause a problem because the information in the latest folder will remain When the rexmgrbackup command is used with the cleanup option specified all information older than the latest information collected by the command will be deleted Table 10 8 Relationship between Backup Method and Data Collected 7 Online Backup Online Backup Fol ffline Back CTMGyyyymmddhhmmss CFMGyyyymmddhhmmss RORyyyymmddhhmmss RBAyyyymmddhhmmss RORSCW yyyymmddhhmmss is the date and time the command was executed G amp Note Ce Backup files of the admin server should be stored on external storage media to prevent the backup data from being corrupted due to server failure Refer to 10 1 5 Online Backup Settings for Metering for information on the storage destination for metering Standard at Backup and Restore Processing Time Estimate the time necessary to perform backup and restoration of the admin server referring to the following command processing time The command processing time differs according to the operation environment so check the time necessary in your environment Base your estimates on the values you obtain from the test p Example 00606060606209209090020606060090909909900600090009090900000009
269. rdware properties refer to 9 3 1 Reconfiguration of Hardware Properties For SPARC Enterprise Servers Replacing a server assigned with spare servers Use the following procedure to switch applications over to a spare server and replace a server with minimal interruption 55 When Replacing an HBA 1 Perform Server Switchover Switch over the server to replace with its spare server For server switchover refer to Chapter 4 Server Switchover in the Operation Guide VE The server to replace is automatically powered off after switchover 2 Replace the Server Replace the HBA of the server Change the OBP settings of the replacement server to match the operating environment For details on OBP settings refer to 8 2 Configure the Server Environment in the Design Guide CE Shut down the server after completing OBP settings Configure the remote management controller of the replacement server with the same IP address user name password and SNMP trap destination as those set on the original server 3 Change the WWN Information Settings Change the WWN information settings for after server replacement to the WWN value of the HBA after server replacement Leave the value of the target CA as the one before changes were made 4 Perform Post server Switchover Operations For details on the operations that must be performed after server switchover refer to 4 3 Post Switchover Operations in the Operation Guide VE am
270. re Administrators CE 2 Stop Managed Servers When using a physical L Server the tenant user must stop the managed server 3 Change to Maintenance Status The infrastructure administrator places the resource of the maintenance target into maintenance mode When the maintenance target is a managed server When using physical L Servers The infrastructure administrator places the physical L Server into maintenance mode For details on maintenance mode refer to Appendix C Maintenance Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE 43 When using a server for which spare servers are not configured When using a server for which spare servers are not configured the infrastructure administrator places the managed server into maintenance mode For details on maintenance mode refer to Appendix C Maintenance Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE When the maintenance target is a network device When the maintenance target is a network device the infrastructure administrator places the relevant network device into maintenance mode and excludes it from being the target of monitoring and auto configuration For details refer to Chapter 22 1 Switchover of Maintenance Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE 4 Implement Regular Maintenance The infrastructure administrator performs the maintenance
271. re administrator modifies the script When an error occurs on hardware or the communication route the infrastructure administrator replaces the hardware 6 Reporting of Investigation Results After completing corrective action the infrastructure administrator reports the results of investigation to the tenant administrator or the tenant user and requests operation of the L Platform 7 Operation of the L Platform The tenant user performs operation of the L Platform again 7 2 7 Setting Alive Monitoring When using alive monitoring on an L Platform it needs to be deployed specifying an L Server template in which the setting of activity monitoring is enabled 18 For information on creating L Server templates refer to Chapter 15 L Server Template Operations in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE If the settings are changed after deployment change the Type of Server specifications by reconfiguring the L Platform Register different L Server templates where heartbeat settings are enabled and disabled Also use L Server template names that make it easy to distinguish whether heartbeat settings are enabled or disabled p Example L Server template name where heartbeat settings are disabled VMware Small L Server template name where heartbeat settings are enabled VMware Small Monitoring 7 2 8 Redundancy Settings When deploying a server with redundancy settings to an L Platform
272. refer to Table 2 69 Supported Network Devices in the Design Guide CE 10 2 2 Backup of Network Devices Whether to back up the network device file is decided according to the CONFIG BACKUP parameter in unm mon rcxprop file Backup is peformed in the following cases When performing auto configuration of network devices When executing rcxadm netdevice cfbackup command specifying the network device Point 0960606060060009209000000090909090000900990990000009029090000009099099090900000090990909000090092909000000009090000606009099290600099 When performing the following operation to manage the latest file for configuration of network device please be sure to back up file for configuration of network device in rexadm netdevice cfbackup command When update file for configuration of network device such as modifying configuration of management information updating of server certificate logging in to network device directly 92 Backup is stored in the network device file storage area of the ROR management server When backing up the network device file backup method differs according to the specifications of network devices When the network device has ftp server function When backup is performed network connection to the specified device is made directly and the backup will be performed When the network device does not have ftp server When backup is performed the backup will be performed over the external ftp server defined
273. reshed without waiting for the regular update When a resource s state is changed as the result of an operation performed by Resource Orchestrator When a failure triggered SNMP Trap is received from a resource If a resource was operated externally to Resource Orchestrator there may be a slight delay before its state is updated in the ROR console To force an update of a resource s data right click the resource and select Update from the displayed menu The time required to update resource data depends on the device Generally update should take no more than 40 seconds In order to restrain device and network load resource data is not refreshed for 7 seconds following the last update time However when a failure triggered SNMP Trap is received resource data is refreshed unconditionally When manually updating a resource from the menu right after performing an operation on that resource if its data is not refreshed within 40 seconds try updating it from the menu again 11 2 Resource Status Resources are monitored in the Status tab of the ROR console on on The Status tab shows the number of servers listed under the statuses warning unknown error or fatal Servers whose status is warning or unknown are counted under Warning and servers whose status is fatal or error are counted under Error Clicking on Error or Warning displays the resources under the corresponding status in the Resource List tab
274. ring alt Application Process SSOSUUE s eene etri ta treten bae eer erre ep get EE Poe erheben sepa 21 8 L2 Deleting an Application Process ASSeSSOE ice erem neret ED e e E sos Re ER Recreo de 21 8 1 2 1 Deleting an Infrastructure Administrator dual role Administrator from IflowUsers Group eee 21 SEA NT ana ei Were c Mee Em 22 3 3 Settings for Pert Number of Management Servers 1 ceres eidem Hed ee aid ED eniin eed ii PE bere 23 8 4 Editing Information m thee Honig WIndgw eie reprae hene rtp aE E K FER HERE PER ACE S CHE RSRS CERE KRE SV GERNE SS CERES SRNE EnS 25 deg antes Padi DU n TNR ms 26 8 5 1 Settings for Permissions to Change LePlatferm Templates teer een inrer PH de Pe ERR 26 2 5 2 Subdet Settings at Sopmont EGIUBE i e cete etra a ed Ea EHE HERE oA KEEE EATEN ERR E TEE Eae e SERE XE RE XE SE Edd Cap ean 27 35 3 Semhines Tor the Simplified Recontiguration PutiE OR lac rtc co te td eee der tid eene etre e Cini ERE Pe rie cepi 27 8 5 4 Diserrbivon Rabia Settiips uio ec eder ote netter P ERG REEL D ndr tr Pe Pe et EE 28 Deal PUM MCALICM Proost puri E 29 6 3 4 1 How to Modify the Application Process Sep iui annee iiec ierit Rete ciere trn e et eet degere endet kh speso 29 ix 8 5 3 2 How to Modify Application Process to be USedl caeco eni em rene e e nee t e SO D cbe nn reris 29 8 5 6 Editing the
275. ription the following operations are performed by an infrastructure administrator 66 Figure 9 5 Image of L2 Switches to Add Access Switch L2 Switch Access Switch L2 Switch Access Switch L2 Switch Access Switch L2 Switch Access Switch Access Switch L2 Switch J L2 Switch Server Server Server Server Server Server Server Design additional configurations Network device administrator Provide the additional network device information to the infrastructure administrator Network device administrator Add a network device in the state where the following operations have been completed Initial configuration Operation test Integration of the device into a physical network configuration Register the resources of the server It is necessary to register chassis or LAN switch blades for a blade server Create network configuration information XML definition using the acquired network device information Register an additional L2 switch as a network device Use the rcxadm netdevice create command to register as a network device 61 6 When the following applies to the additional network device create and register rulesets When adding an L2 switch of a model for which sample scripts are not prepared or an L2 switch of a model that has not been used in the system until now In this case it is necessary to create a directory to allocate rulesets t
276. rm The network device administrator must confirm the network device status using the following procedure a Log in directly to a network device other than the L Platform b Confirm the status of the network device wA See For details on the rexadm netdevice command refer to 3 8 rexadm netdevice in the Reference Guide Command XML CE For details on the operations such as status confirmation for network devices refer to the manuals of network devices 11 4 1 2 When Changing State is Detected during Status Confirmation Using the ROR Console When changing state is detected during status confirmation using the ROR console it can be determined that an error might have occurred on the network device which has indicated changing state a firewall a server load balancer or an L2 switch When the network device on which changing state has occurred is a firewall Confirm the status of the firewall For details on how to confirm the status of the firewall refer to 11 4 2 Firewall Status Confirmation When the network device on which changing state has occurred is a server load balancer Confirm the status of the server load balancer For details on how to confirm the status of the server load balancer refer to 11 4 3 Server Load Balancer Status Confirmation When the network device on which changing state has occurred is an L2 switch Check the status of the L2 switch For details on how to confirm the L2 switch statu
277. rprise Linux R 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 1 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 2 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 3 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 5 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 6 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 7 for Intel64 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for x86 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 8 for Intel64 s Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for x86 Red Hat Ent 16 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for Intel64 RHELS Xen Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for x86 Linux Virtual Machine Function Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 5 4 for Intel64 Linux Virtual Machine Function Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Red Hat R Enterprise Linux R 6 2 for Intel64 Virtual Machine Function SCVMM System Center Virtual Machine Manager 2008 R2 System Center 2012 Virtual Machine Manager Vi VMware R ESX R 4 VMware vSphere R 4 0 VMware vSphere R Client VMware R vCenter TM Server VMware R Distributed Power Management BMC BladeLogic Server Automation ServerView SNMP
278. rs server_pool Server pool Variable length string name unlimited cpu_num Value entered 1 to 999999 for number of CPUs cpu_input_nu s Value entered 1 to 999999 m for number of CPUs Value entered 1 to 999999 Unit 0 1 GHz for CPU Maximum 99999 9 GHz performance cpu input per Value entered 1 to 999999 Unit 0 1 GHz f for CPU Maximum 99999 9 GHz performance memory size Value entered 1 to 999999 Unit 0 1 GB for memory Maximum 99999 9 GB capacity memory input Value entered 1 to 999999 Unit 0 1 GB _size for memory Maximum 99999 9 GB capacity storage_pool Yes Yes N o Yes Storage pool Variable length string name unlimited disk size Yes No No No Yes System disk 1 to 999999 Unit 0 1 GB size Maximum 99999 9 GB server templat Yes No No No Yes L Server ASCII 1 to 32 characters e_name template ID status No No No No Yes Status RUNNING Active STOPPED Stopped Yes Output No Not output 182 Disk In addition to the common items output the following items will be output Item ID Output for each event Item name Description CHANGE DELETE PERIOD org id Yes Yes Yes Yes Tenant name ASCII 1 to 32 characters Name of the tenant user id Yes Yes Yes Yes User account ASCII 1 to 32 characters User that owns the L Platform Yes L Platform ID ASCII 1 to 32 characters ID identifying the L Platform server id Yes L Server ID ASCII 1 to 32 characters ID identifying the L Server disk id Ye
279. rties are re configured 2o Chapter 10 Backup and Restoration This chapter describes how to operate the backup and restoration of ServerView Resource Orchestrator Cloud Edition 10 1 Backup and Restoration of Admin Servers This section describes how to operate the backup and restoration of the admin server of ServerView Resource Orchestrator Cloud Edition Backing up the Admin Server The two methods of backing up the Management Server are shown below With either method backup can be performed by executing one command the rexmgrbackup command For details on the rexmgrbackup command refer to 6 6 rcxmgrbackup in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Offline Backup The manager of this product is stopped and then resources are backed up A backup is taken at the following times When installation of this product has completed When using an offline backup backup of the following resource is not performed Audit log Network device configuration file Online Backup Resources are backed up without the manager of this product being stopped Backing up periodically is recommended for online backups To save time when restoring configuration information at operation take an online backup if configuration information is to be updated When using an online backup backup of the following resources is not performed Dashboard Information Operational Status Information Audit Log Application Information Definition Fi
280. rver as follows ROR console server port number L Platform management port number Stop the manager before changing the port number Restart the manager after changing the port number Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to start and stop the manager Note that there is no need to stop and start the manager for each port number Changing the Port Number of the ROR Console Server The procedure for changing the port number is as follows 293 1 Modify the portal properties file Open the following file Windows Manager Installation folderNRCXCTMGNSecurityManagementNconfNMportal properties Linux Manager etc opt FJSVctsec conf portal properties Change the port numbers specified in the following URLs Set the same values in the port numbers portalSsLurl authedPortal url sendmail auth url 2 Start the Interstage Management Console The procedure for starting the Interstage Management Console is as follows Windows Manager From the Start menu select All Programs gt Interstage gt Application Server gt Interstage Management Console Linux Manager 1 Start the Web browser 2 Specify the URL of the Interstage Management Console The URL format is as follows If SSL encrypted communication is not being used http LHost name Port number IsAdmin If SSL encrypted communication is being used https Host name Port number IsAdmin 3 Login to the Interstage Man
281. rver import command The template information list can be obtained using the template information list display command Refer to 9 12 cfmg_listtemplate Displaying Template Information List in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on how to use the template information list display command Point Check the following tags to distinguish between automatically generated templates Template ID lt template gt lt id gt The template ID output when the L Server import command is executed L Server name lt template gt lt description gt The L Server name specified when the L Server import command is executed 4 Execute the output function of the product master maintenance command The accounting information of the L Platform templates registered on the product master will be output to the specified accounting information file by executing the output function of the product master maintenance command Refer to 10 4 productmaintain Product Master Maintenance in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on the output function of the product master maintenance command This operation is unnecessary for the initial registration Create a new accounting information file from step 4 5 Add the accounting information to the output accounting information file based on the template information list When applying a start date for the accounting information to be added specify a date time prior to the date time that
282. s refer to 11 4 4 L2 Switch Status Confirmation 101 QA See For details on the operations such as status confirmation for network devices refer to the manuals of network devices 0606062002000909000000099099090900000909090909000009009099290990900000909090909090900009090590900000090909900000000990990909000000999000600909299 11 4 2 Firewall Status Confirmation This section explains the confirmation procedure of firewall status 11 4 2 1 When an L Platform Using a Firewall is Identified Use the following procedure to confirm the status of the firewall 1 In the orchestration tree select the network device of a firewall under the L Platform 2 Select the Resource Details tab and click the link of Preserved resource of Network Device of Basic Information of Network Device The Resource Details tab of the network device is displayed 3 Confirm the displayed detailed information When the target network device is in redundant configuration confirm both the devices are in active status and standby status When there is a link of Launch Network Device Web UI in Hardware Details a Click the link and start the firewall management screen b Confirm event log status interface system condition and operation status and whether communication packet can pass or not from the started management window and check the error detected by the firewall When there is no link of Launch Network Device Web UI in Hardw
283. s Yes Yes Yes Disk ID ASCII 1 to 32 characters ID identifying the disk system name Yes Yes No Yes L Platform UTF 8 1 to 256 characters name Name of the L Platform comment Yes storage pool disk name Yes Yes No Disk name UTF 8 1 to 256 characters Name of the disk Yes Yes No Storage pool Variable length string name unlimited disk size Yes Yes No Disk size to 999999 Unit 0 1 GB Maximum 99999 9 GB Yes Output No Not output L Platform template In addition to the common items output the following items will be output Item ID Output for each event Item name Description ADD CHANGE DELETE PERIOD org id Yes Yes Tenant name ASCII 1 to 32 characters Name of the tenant user id Yes Yes User account ASCII 1 to 32 characters User that owns the L Platform L Platform UTF 8 1 to 256 characters template name Name of the L Platform template id Yes Yes Yes L Platform ASCII 1 to 32 characters template ID ID identifying the L Platform template template_name Yes Yes Output No Not output template Software In addition to the common items output the following items will be output 183 Item ID Output for each event Item name Description CHANGE DELETE PERIOD user id Tenant name ASCII 1 to 32 characters Name of the tenant User account ASCII 1 to 32 characters User that owns the L Platform vsys id L Platform ID ASCII 1 to 32 characters ID identifying the L Platform server_id L Server
284. s for the estimated price display function are enabled Refer to 8 7 1 Display Function Settings for Estimated Price for information on settings for the estimated price display function 15 2 1 Information Maintained by Product Master The accounting information can be set to the product master as products for each element type category that consists of the L Platform The categories that can be set as products are shown below Note that the unit prices can be specified by yearly monthly or hourly Virtual L Server Unit price per virtual L Server Set the unit price based on system disk snapshot and software etc Do not include the price for CPU CPU clock or memory in the specified value Physical L Server Unit price per physical L Server Set the unit price based on system disk snapshot and software etc Do not include the price for CPU CPU clock or memory in the specified value Note that the usage fee the estimated price displayed on the L Platform Management window may differ from actual price 2 Data disk Capacity Unit price per disk capacity of 0 1GB 3 Template Unit price per L Platform template Set the unit price based on firewall cost network resources network line global IP segment NIC usage cost and system SE cost etc Do not include the price for virtual server or virtual disk in the specified value The price per CPU allocated as usage fee the estimated price is the sum of Unit price
285. s saved according to procedure of 10 1 2 2 Back up the Resources of this Product replace the following folder with the saving informations Windows Manager gt Installation_folder SVROR Manager var netdevice Linux Manager var opt FJSVrcvmr netdevice Restoring Image Management Information If the following image management information that was saved at backup has been changed reset it Number of stored snapshot generations 87 Windows Manager In value specify the number of stored generations that were saved at backup gt Installation_folder SVROR Manager bin rcxadm imagemgr set attr vm snapshot maxversion value RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrcvmr bin rcxadm imagemgr set attr vm snapshot maxversion value RETURN For details on the rcxadm imagemgr command refer to 5 9 rcxadm imagemgr in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 10 1 4 3 Starting the Manager Execute the command shown below to start the Manager For details on the command refer to 5 19 rcxmgrctl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE Windows Manager Installation folderNSVRORMManagerMbinNrcexmgrctl start RETURN Linux Manager opt FJSVrcvmr bin rcxmgrctl start RETURN 10 1 4 4 Disabling L Platform Applications Disable an L Platform application for which an application process no longer exists if online backup of the admin server has been performed For details on the command refer to 12 1
286. section explains how to change the settings for L Platform management 8 5 1 Settings for Permissions to Change L Platform Templates Specify whether to permit modification of the value specified in the L Platform template when an L Platform usage application is made in the L Platform Management window Note that if modification is not permitted it is not possible to modify the configuration of L Platforms that have already been deployed Point Settings for Permissions to Change L Platform Templates can be set by Setup Wizard on the ROR Console For details of Setup Wizard refer to 3 1 Setup Wizard in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE Stopping the manager Stop the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to stop the manager Changing L Platform templates The procedure for changing the settings for whether or not changes to the L Platform templates in the L Platform management window are to be permitted is as follows Open the following file Windows Manager Installation folderNRCXCTMGMMyPortalNconfigNcustom config xml Linux Manager etc opt FJSVctmyp config custom config xml The following information must be modified The entry tag with no configuration as the key value Modify the value of the entry tag with no configuration as the key value The section in italics is the information to be modified Specify false to allow the L Platform template
287. server serverId002 Disk Capacity StragePool3 10GB X9 7230 h 6h 59 134 Chapter 16 Monitoring Logs This chapter explains how to monitor logs 16 1 Operation Logs This section explains the operation logs of Resource Orchestrator amp Note Operation logs should be used by only infrastructure administrators or administrators as all user operations of Resource Orchestrator can be viewed Displaying resource names arranged in hierarchies is not supported 16 1 1 Overview Provides the functions to record user operations as operation logs in Resource Orchestrator Using this function administrators can monitor the following information Time events were recorded in the operation logs UserID User group name IP address Status Resource name Operations The operation logs are output in the following formats Date User Group Progress Resource Event The time events recorded in the operation logs are output in the local time If daylight Time events were savings time a regulation of time in summer is set on the operating system the recorded in the operation time events are output in daylight savings time logs Time events are output in the following format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS XXX User ID The user ID of the logged in user is output ser When a special administrator uses the command a hyphen is output The name of the user group name the logged in user belongs to is output
288. sk array to make backups chassis A chassis used to house server blades and partitions Sometimes referred to as an enclosure 189 cloning Creation of a copy of a system disk cloning image A backup of a system disk which does not contain server specific information system node name IP address etc made during cloning When deploying a cloning image to the system disk of another server Resource Orchestrator automatically changes server specific information to that of the target server Cloud Edition The edition which can be used to provide private cloud environments data center A facility that manages client resources servers storage networks etc and provides internet connections and maintenance operational services directory service A service for updating and viewing the names and associated attributes of physical logical resource names scattered across networks based on organizational structures and geographical groups using a systematic tree shaped structure management methodology disk resource The unit for resources to connect to an L Server An example being a virtual disk provided by LUN or VM management software DN Distinguished Name A name defined as a line of an RDN which contains an entry representing its corresponding object and higher entry Domain A system that is divided into individual systems using partitioning Also used to indicate a partition DR Option The
289. sources This section explains how to realize high availability of managed resources The methods of environment creation and operation for enabling higher availability of managed resources vary depending on resources involved Servers Refer to 17 1 1 High Availability of L Servers Blade Chassis Refer to 17 1 2 Blade Chassis High Availability Storage Chassis Refer to 17 1 3 High Availability for Storage Chassis 17 1 1 High Availability of L Servers This section explains high availability for L Servers Regardless of the server type select the HA checkbox on the Server tab to perform redundancy settings when creating an L Server For physical L Servers Select the HA checkbox to enable the selection of the pool of a spare server The server pool of the spare server that the physical server will use for automatic switchover is registered in can be specified For details on the Server tab refer to 16 2 2 Server Tab in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE For the details on conditions for switchover to spare servers refer to 9 3 Server Switchover Conditions in the Setup Guide VE For virtual L Servers Settings differ according to the server virtualization software being used Refer to 16 3 2 Server Tab in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE Checks of Spare Server Models and Configurations The L Server definitio
290. sses for the network interfaces used on the admin LAN This step can be skipped if no network interface was replaced Admin LAN MAC Address NIC1 Required only if the agent is not registered Additional Information When a server is powered off for the reason given in the Additional Information in 1 the item for input of the value of NIC1 is displayed In this case input the MAC address confirmed in the Additional Information in 1 MAC address NIC2 under SAN Boot admin LAN redundancy This item is only required for the following cases When using the HBA address rename setup service When using GLS for admin LAN redundancy on the target server For the spare server of a managed server using admin LAN redundancy 4 Click OK The original hardware properties of the selected managed server are updated with new hardware properties obtained from the replacement server For PRIMEQUEST Servers Use the following procedure to re configure properties for replaced hardware l 2 Replace the system board or GSPB and insert the server After approximately 30 seconds right click the target server in the ROR console server resource tree and select Hardware Maintenance Re configure from the popup menu The Re configure Hardware Properties dialog is displayed Click lt OK gt The original hardware properties of the selected managed server are updated with new hardware properties obtained from the replacement server
291. store it A Information 00900000000000009909920909090900000090909999090909000000000090909900900000000000090092909920900000000000999999900000099 6 The backup and restore functions available in Resource Orchestrator can be used to restore the boot disk contents For details refer to Chapter 16 Backup and Restore in the User s Guide VE 9 3 Maintenance for Servers Other Than Blade Servers This section explains server maintenance for other than blade servers 9 3 1 Reconfiguration of Hardware Properties This section explains how to re configure hardware properties for replaced hardware After hardware replacement it is necessary to re configure Resource Orchestrator with the new hardware properties Note Ensure this operation is performed only after the replacement of one of the following a server itself the NIC used for either the admin or public LAN or the HBA If it is not there is a possibility that operations on the server will not run correctly When the system board or GSPB of a PRIMEQUEST server has been changed ensure that this operation is performed If it is not there is a possibility that operations on the server will not run correctly After replacing the hardware the server status becomes unknown The appropriate status can be restored by re configuring the hardware properties from the server Prerequisites The following prerequisites must be satisfied before this operation can be performed Bo
292. strator manager regularly updates resource data with information gathered from the following resources 95 Table 11 2 List of Regularly Updated Resources and Their Related Resources Resources Subject to Regular Update Related Resources Server Physical OS VM host 1 VM guest 1 ServerView Agents 2 Server management unit Server virtualization software LAN switch blade LAN switch blade EAN switch blade Server management unit 3 L2 switch L2 switch Network device Firewall Firewall Server load balancer Server load balancer VM management software VM management software VM host 1 VM management software VM guest 1 When no VM management software is registered the status of VM hosts and VM guests is updated during a regular update of their physical server When VM management software is registered their status is updated during the regular update of the VM management software 2 Only for PRIMERGY servers and PRIMEQUEST 3 Only for LAN switch blades mounted in a PRIMERGY BX chassis The time required to update all resources depends on the number of registered resources For 1 chassis that contains 10 servers and 4 LAN switches the update takes about 2 minutes For 5 chassis that have identical configurations the update should take about 10 minutes VM management software updates are independent from other resource updates and takes approximately 3 minutes In the following cases resource data is ref
293. t FJSVrcvmr bin rcxadm imagemgr info gt file RETURN Parameter file Specify the name of the file for output For details on the rexadm imagemgr command refer to 5 9 rcxadm imagemgr in the Reference Guide Command XML CE 10 1 3 Online Backup of the Admin Server This section describes online backup of the admin server When using online backup of the admin server the PostgreSQL Point In Time Recovery PITR mechanism is used in the backup of the metering database When using PITR backup and restoration the following two resource types are backed up and restored Base Backup The entire database cluster file group in which database data is recorded is backed up WAL File Write Ahead Log WAL files are files in which the contents of updates to the database are recorded Backup of the two preceding resource types is taken when the commands for the two corresponding backup methods base backup and differential backup are executed Resources that are backed up and restored using PITR are stored in the directory that has been specified in the settings file regardless of the storage destination specified when the command was executed Refer to 10 1 5 Online Backup Settings for Metering for information on how to set this Each of the backup methods for performing online backup of the admin server is described below Base Backup Base backup is the backup of the entire database cluster file group in which database data is
294. t L Server in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for details on this command Note When an L Server for infrastructure administrator is imported to an L Platform the operation privileges of the L Server are transferred to the tenant administrator or the tenant user When this L Server is released from the L Platform by the cfmg deletelserver command the L Server is changed back to the one for infrastructure administrator L Servers without network interface cards NICs cannot be imported Noinitial password information will be set for an L Server that has been imported without image information being specified initial password is will be displayed on the initial password confirmation window of the system details window of the L Platform management window An L Server that is under a tenant cannot be imported to a different tenant When importing an L Server that is not under a tenant switch the power off for the L Server targeted for import Do not import physical L Servers that have VM hosts installed Refer to Appendix D Installing VM Hosts on Physical L Servers in the Setup Guide CE for information on installing VM hosts on a physical L Server 7 2 3 3 Releasing L Servers L Servers that have been imported into the L Platform management function can be released from the L Platform by using the L Server release command cfmg_deletelserver Refer to 12 2 cfmg_deletelserver Release L Server in the R
295. t function settings G amp Note 006060600009099090000090909909909000090099090000009009900900900000909090909000009090000000000990900990900000099090900000009200900006090299 If the overcommit function is used the settings must match those of the L Platform Management overcommit function Point 06060606060209209090600000909000909000090099090900000900929000000090909009000090909090909000000909909090000000990909290600000990006060060909299 System Condition Server List Setting can be set by Setup Wizard on the ROR Console For details of Setup Wizard refer to 3 1 Setup Wizard in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE Use the procedure below to change the System Condition Server List settings 1 Open the following file Windows Manager Installation folderNSWRBAMNCMDBNFJSVcmdbmNCMDBConsoleNWEB INFNclassesNviewlist en xml Linux Manager opt FJSVcmdbm CMDBConsole WEB INF classes viewlist en xml 2 Setthe following items Settings item Explanation serverByOrg ROR bottom column 11 isEnable Set true to display the CPU Reserve Clock Rate Set false to hide it The default value is false serverByOrg ROR bottom column 14 isEnable Set true to display the Memory Reserve Size Set false to hide it The default value is false A settings example is shown below lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 lt properties gt omitted lt entry key serverByOrg_ROR bottom column 11 isEnable
296. target No data is collected from servers on which ServerView Agents is not running In this case missing data is shown using hyphens When power consumption data is exported if the latest data is being collected at that point some data may be shown using hyphens n Ifthe Finest sampling rate is selected in the Export Environmental Data power monitoring target dialog the power and average power values will be equal for each data sample If a rate other than Finest sampling has been selected in the Export Environmental Data power monitoring target dialog values for each sample are displayed as follows If data was collected at the displayed sample time that value is displayed If no data was collected at the displayed sample time the last data collected in the time interval between that sample and the previous sample will be displayed The energy Wh value of a finest sample is calculated under the assumption that the power value W collected for the sample stayed at the same value until the next sampling in other words it is assumed that power values W do not vary during the duration of the polling interval Only daily average data can be collected from blade chassis Data collected from servers does not include power consumed by storage blades For rates other than Finest sampling the energy value is calculated as the sum of energy samples In such cases the energy value of samples for which no
297. te teet epe Rue eia raea cues n E be ne a Hin Reha irte put e svat shia EAER 15 TI Revew Tor L Platoou Usage Applications uie eer ert rrr ettet retire n tek dete o t e e needs 15 ES suu ELLE OE Le S il I 15 peewAstC IM loq bog CM 15 Taa Updatne the Ceara Ants EUM 15 2 2 3 TORUS TEP LALOR 1 5 oerte erro E eee eee AAEN 15 72 3 1 Network Information Settings for Converted L Servers 1 15 eerte tnter rere t th e tendente 16 pep 16 AUREIS Ee ci 16 Tad Seine OS with Deployment on BEEL R VNII 5 dritte aret eterne tete tire ertet pe 16 1 2 5 Stantup Priority Level Seta ocior ettet eie entere a edidi oit rii i loe pU lae 7 2 6 Action to Take when an Error has Occurred sra ARS BOBO aco EO tr ca tas rere ke die e E OE EO Ree ge ere phe e ab De rae a e ede dece ned 72 8 Red undance Setitilbs c epentepeeme omite cerei tete eot ore ede E e pete di e Or odes 29 Awuonmalic Server REIGaSe SEHEN 2 tetris tati tace iti tet e ea meer e o ded ia esos Li Ph iet e er EORR RESES 7 2 10 Definition VM Specific Information Denon PH eiii oer Deere bet rtr tetro tette a eti Here Reti peek 20 72 11 Changing Server Specihcatns ea a VM ESL cete etate leere nie iiie rete epa e di ebd 20 Chapter S Changing Seung MT ER 21 8 1 Registering and Deleting Application Process ASSESSOES oerte terit ene errem FERRE EE cri e er tb RP E Ip n aede 21 amp T I Reciste
298. ter starting the recording of operation logs Use the following procedure to make changes 1 Stop recording operation logs Display the operation logs and back up the necessary portions from the records Confirm the retention folder for the operation logs Empty the retention folder by moving all files in the retention folder checked in 3 to a new location Ue e CUM pP Modify the settings in the Date and Time properties dialog 6 Start recording operation logs For details on operations for operation logs refer to 5 13 rcxadm logctl in the Reference Guide Command XML CE amp Note Once recording operations are stopped user operations are not recorded until the recording of logs is started again 139 Performing this procedure resets the recording period of operation logs to 0 0600620009099900000909099900009090909909009000090900990990909090000909099090000090909090900000009099099090920000909099909000000990900000009299 16 1 4 Scope of Operations Recorded in Operation Logs The scope of operations recorded in operation logs and the character strings displayed in the Event column are as indicated below Table 16 1 Scope of Operations Strings Displayed in the Event Column lserverscreate 000 sememdemy sememuple Lemessan 0 Lsmessop lserversrestat Lsememauh smesdench folders moveresouree lservers migrate 0 Lsmesstaus Transmission of network information to physical L
299. tform in the User s Guide for Tenant Users CE 2 Approval The tenant administrator approves the application by a tenant user to use an L Platform For details refer to 9 3 Approving an Application in the User s Guide for Tenant Administrators CE 3 Assessment The infrastructure administrator assesses the content of the application to use an L Platform from the tenant administrator or tenant user For details refer to 10 2 Assessing an Application in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE 4 Notification of settings for firewalls and server load balancers When using a firewall or a server load balancer the infrastructure administrator prepares a script for configuring the firewall or server load balancer Based on the information provided by the infrastructure administrator the tenant administrator notifies the tenant user of the configuration information for the firewall or server load balancer 5 Configure firewalls When configuring an application on an L Server that has been deployed on the public LAN the tenant user needs to create a rule that enables access to that L Server from the public LAN 6 Configure applications The tenant user performs the installation and environment settings necessary for the application to be provided as a service by the L Server 7 Confirm communication with applications The tenant user checks that there are no problems with the applications installed on the L Serve
300. th the replaced server and replacement server must be the same model A warning message is shown if the model of the replacement server differs from that of the replaced server The replaced server and replacement server must both be of the same blade type If the blade types of the replaced and replacement servers are different an error will occur To move a server to a different slot within a chassis the server must be deleted first and then registered again after being inserted in its new slot Pre Configuration For SPARC Enterprise servers the hardware properties are automatically re configured 52 Re configuring Hardware Properties after Server Replacement For Rack Mount and Tower Servers Use the following procedure to re configure properties for replaced hardware I If the agent or ServerView Agents has already been registered power on the server Additional Information When a server using SAN boot has a hardware exchange that results in the MAC address used for the admin LAN being changed the OS and an agent cannot be started In this case the server should be started once and the MAC address confirmed on the BIOS hardware screen After the MAC address is confirmed power off the server again In the ROR console server resource tree right click the target server and select Hardware Maintenance Re configure from the popup menu The Re configure Hardware Properties dialog is displayed Enter MAC addre
301. the L Server import command was executed Omit the end of applicable date Refer to 15 2 2 Accounting Information File Format for information on the accounting information file format Example Product Priorit Unit Start of applicable date End of applicable date ID y price ID001 C 2 00 2012 01 01T00 00 00 000 0900 6 Execute the register function of the product master maintenance command Specify the accounting information file updated and execute the product master maintenance command Refer to 10 4 productmaintain Product Master Maintenance in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on the register function of the product master maintenance command 15 3 2 Modify Accounting Information Command Modify the accounting information of the L Platform templates that are already enabled This corresponds to the case of raising the price or setting limited time price for campaign It is also possible to modify accounting information for L Servers imported into the system Follow the procedures below to modify accounting information for either L Platform templates registered in the product master or L Servers imported into the system 1 Execute the output function of the product master maintenance command The accounting information of the L Platform templates registered on the product master will be output to the specified accounting information file by executing the output function of the product master maintenance
302. the accounting 15 1 Overview This section explains an overview of the accounting This function provides the basis to usage charge corresponding to the L Platforms used by each tenant The accounting includes following functions Manage accounting information of L Platform templates Add modify or delete the accounting information of L Platform templates Based on the accounting information usage fee the estimated price of L Platform templates can be displayed on the L Platform management window etc Usage charges can also be viewed in the usage charge window The database where the accounting information of L Platform templates is stored is called the product master G amp Note Usage fee the estimated price for the L Platform template will be displayed provided that settings for the estimated price display function are enabled Refer to 8 7 1 Display Function Settings for Estimated Price for information on settings for the estimated price display function Usage charge calculation Usage charges are calculated based on the amount that the L Platform is used and the charge information The calculated usage charge is sent to the email address specified in the tenant management window of the ROR console The usage charge is also stored in the usage charge database Viewing usage charges Usage charges can be viewed in the ROR console If necessary the usage charge information can also be downloaded as a file Operation image
303. the following commands to update MAC address bindings re enable automatic startup of the xend daemon and restart the xend daemon itself usr local sbin macbindconfig create lt RETURN gt chkconfig xend on RETURN service xend start lt RETURN gt Linux When the configuration of server components has been changed check the configuration file of the OS and make any necessary corrections For details refer to Configuration File Check in 2 1 1 1 Software Preparation and Checks in the Setup Guide CE Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 When adding or removing network interfaces if the target server is running Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 after completing the steps described in 9 3 2 Replacing Servers modify the configuration file For details refer to Configuration File Check in 2 2 1 1 Software Preparation and Checks in the Setup Guide CE Replacing a GSPB The procedure used to replace a GSPB is the same as that described in Replacing a network interface Replace NIC with GSPB in the procedure Replacing an HBA The procedure used to replace an HBA is the same as that described in 9 3 2 Replacing Servers When using I O virtualization the replacement HBA will automatically inherit the WWN originally set on the replaced HBA Therefore there is no need to re configure access paths on the storage side When configuring WWN information it is necessary to change WWN information settings to the replaced
304. the metering logs for which accounting calculations are complete will be deleted Refer to 8 7 3 Metering Log Settings for information on the metering log operational settings file 187 Glossary access path A logical path configured to enable access to storage volumes from servers active mode The state where a managed server is performing operations Managed servers must be in active mode in order to use Auto Recovery Move managed servers to maintenance mode in order to perform backup or restoration of system images or collection or deployment of cloning images active server A physical server that is currently operating admin client A terminal PC connected to an admin server which is used to operate the GUI admin LAN A LAN used to manage resources from admin servers It connects managed servers storage and network devices admin server A server used to operate the manager software of Resource Orchestrator affinity group A grouping of the storage volumes allocated to servers A function of ETERNUS Equivalent to the LUN mapping of EMC agent The section program of Resource Orchestrator that operates on managed servers aggregate A unit for managing storage created through the aggregation of a RAID group Aggregates can contain multiple Flex Vols alias name A name set for each ETERNUS LUN to distinguish the different ETERNUS LUNs Auto Deploy A function for deploying VMware E
305. the physical server to use In the Modify an L Server dialog specify the restored server for Physical server For details on how to modify the physical server to use refer to 17 2 1 Modifying Specifications in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE 163 3 Start the L Server For details on how to start an L Server refer to 17 1 1 Starting an L Server in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Resource Management CE 17 1 3 High Availability for Storage Chassis This section explains high availability of storage chassis connected to physical L Servers If performing replication between two storage units of LUNs used by a physical L Server quick restoration of physical L Servers is possible even when storage units have failed This section explains the switchover of disks used by physical L Servers between two storage units on which replication of LUNs is managed by a single manager When performing switchover of physical L Servers and disks used by physical L Servers in a Disaster Recovery environment refer to Chapter 18 Disaster Recovery Figure 17 1 Switchover of Operating or Standby Status of Storage P OOO __ 4 Manager i ES t When the disk resource is created using dynamic LUN mirroring refer to When Using Dynamic LUN Mirroring Prerequisites For details on prerequisites for high availability of storage chassis refer to 7 2 Storage Ch
306. ting information file updated and execute the product master maintenance command Refer to 10 4 productmaintain Product Master Maintenance in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on the register function of the product master maintenance command Enable the L Platform template Enable the L Platform template on the start of applicable date Refer to 8 3 6 Publishing and Hiding L Platform Template in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE for information on how to enable the L Platform templates Registering Accounting Information for L Servers imported into the System Use the following procedures to import an L Server into the system and register accounting information for the imported L Server 1 Use the L Server import command to import the L Server into the system Refer to 12 4 cfmg_importlserver Import L Server in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on how to use the L Server import command 122 G amp Note If the lt VM pool name gt option is omitted when executing the L Server import command it will not be possible to register accounting information for the CPU CPU clock or memory capacity If the lt storage pool name gt option is omitted when executing the L Server import command it will not be possible to register accounting information for the L Server data disk 2 Obtain the template information list that was automatically generated by the L Se
307. ting the output function of the product master maintenance command Refer to 10 4 productmaintain Product Master Maintenance in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on the output function of the product master maintenance command 2 Delete accounting information that becomes unnecessary from the output accounting information file 3 Execute the register function of the product master maintenance command Specify the accounting information file updated and execute the product master maintenance command Refer to 10 4 productmaintain Product Master Maintenance in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on the register function of the product master maintenance command 15 3 4 Reference Accounting Information Follow the procedure below to reference the accounting information registered on the product master 1 Execute the output function of the product master maintenance command The accounting information of the L Platform templates registered on the product master will be output to the specified accounting information file by executing the output function of the product master maintenance command Refer to 10 4 productmaintain Product Master Maintenance in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on the output function of the product master maintenance command 2 Reference the output accounting information file Reference the accounting information file that was output by the output fun
308. tion list Execute the output function of the product master maintenance command The accounting information of the L Platform templates registered on the product master will be output to the specified accounting information file by executing the output function of the product master maintenance command Refer to 10 4 productmaintain Product Master Maintenance in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on the output function of the product master maintenance command This operation is unnecessary for the initial registration Create a new accounting information file from step 4 Add the accounting information of the L Platform templates to the output accounting information file based on the template information list Specify a date prior to the L Platform template enabled date as the start of applicable date in the accounting information to be added Omit the end of applicable date Refer to 15 2 2 Accounting Information File Format for information on the accounting information file format Example Product Priorit Unit Start of applicable date End of applicable date ID y price ID001 oo 2 00 2012 01 01T00 00 00 000 0900 Notify the tenant of the contents of the newly enabled L Platform templates L Platform template name summary of the L Platform template usage fee the estimated price start of applicable date etc Execute the register function of the product master maintenance command Specify the accoun
309. to be modified Specify true to not allow it to be modified The default value is false entry key no configuration gt false lt entry gt Starting the manager Start the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to start the manager 26 8 5 2 Subnet Settings at Segment Editing It is possible to change the method for setting up the subnets that are allocated to segments when performing an application to use L Platform Use the following procedure to use network resource names rather than IP addresses to select which subnets to allocate to segments during subnet setup Refer to 8 3 14 L Platform Reconfiguration in the User s Guide for Tenant Administrators for details on changing the configuration Point Subnet Setting at Segment Editing can be set by Setup Wizard on the ROR Console For details of Setup Wizard refer to 3 1 Setup Wizard in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE 1 Open the Manager View settings file in a text editor The Manager View settings file is stored in the following location Windows Manager Installation folderNRCXCTMGMMyPortalNconfigNmanagerview config xml Linux Manager etc opt FJSVctmyp config managerview config xml 2 Add the following key and value network list show resource name false Uses the IP address to select a subnet This is the default value This is applicable even when this key is not defined
310. to be registered Example Halve the price in the period between 2012 08 01 and 2012 08 31 Before modification Product Priori Unit Start of applicable date End of applicable date ID ty price moi o s2 00 2012 01 0rT00 0000 000 0500 After modification Product Priori Unit Start of applicable date End of applicable date ID t price Dawa or o 200 zz ororrooonoo000 0500 ibo 1 1 00 2012 08 01T00 00 00 0004 0900 2012 08 31T23 59 59 999 0900 Do not modify existing data A Set as follows for new data B Priority Higher priority than the existing data A Unit price New unit price Start of applicable date Start date of the period End of applicable date End date of the period Refer to 15 2 2 Accounting Information File Format for information on the accounting information file format 3 Notify the tenant of the contents of the modified L Platform templates L Platform template name usage fee the estimated price start of applicable date etc 4 Execute the register function of the product master maintenance command Specify the accounting information file updated and execute the product master maintenance command Refer to 10 4 productmaintain Product Master Maintenance in the Reference Guide Command XML CE for information on the register function of the product master maintenance command 124 Note If the applicable start date is not set to a future date and time
311. to be replaced before shutting it down For details on how to activate maintenance LEDs refer to 9 2 1 Maintenance LED Replace the Server Replace the server whose maintenance LED is activated Change the BIOS settings of the replacement server to match the operating environment For details on BIOS settings refer to 8 2 Configure the Server Environment in the Design Guide CE Shut down the server after completing BIOS settings Re configure Hardware Properties after Replacement After replacing the server re configure Resource Orchestrator with the latest hardware properties For details on how to re configure hardware properties refer to 9 3 1 Reconfiguration of Hardware Properties After hardware properties have been re configured the maintenance LED is automatically turned off in the ROR console Restore the Boot Disk Local Boot There is no need to restore the boot disk if the original disk is installed on the replaced server Simply power on the replacement server If the boot disk was replaced and a system image backup was collected restore that backup Refer to 16 3 Restoring a System Image in the User s Guide VE for details on how to restore a system image After the system image is restored the server will be automatically powered on If there is no backup of the system image run the installation program again SAN Boot As the replaced server can be easily configured to access the original boot disk usi
312. to replace with its spare server For server switchover refer to Chapter 4 Server Switchover in the Operation Guide VE The server is automatically powered off after switchover 2 Replace the Server Replace the server Use the Maintenance Wizard of the Management Board Web UI to perform replacement For details on the Maintenance Wizard refer to the PRIMEQUEST manual Also change the BIOS settings of the replacement server to match the operating environment For details on BIOS settings refer to 8 2 Configure the Server Environment in the Design Guide CE Shut down the server after completing BIOS settings 3 Re configure Hardware Properties after Replacement After replacing the server re configure Resource Orchestrator with the latest hardware properties For details on how to re configure hardware properties refer to 9 3 1 Reconfiguration of Hardware Properties 4 Perform Post server Switchover Operations For details on the operations that must be performed after server switchover refer to 4 3 Post Switchover Operations in the Operation Guide VE Replacing a Server with no Spare Server Assigned Use the following procedure to smoothly replace a server and resume its applications Place the Server into Maintenance Mode Place the primary server to replace into maintenance mode For details on maintenance mode refer to Appendix C Maintenance Mode in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators Reso
313. trator or Tenant User Use the following procedure to determine the location of the problem 1 Confirm the network device status using the ROR console If event logs showing the changing port state of network devices are not output If a port status change on a registered network device is detected the message number 22784 will be output If the port status is down or unknown and that change was not caused by the infrastructure administrator it may indicates a problem with the network device If status icons of resources on the network device tree have not changed to a status other than normal 2 When there is a network device on which changing state has occurred check if the device is the network device used for an L Platform for which notification has been received When changing state occurs on a network device which is not used for the L Platform for which notification has been received refer to 11 4 1 2 When Changing State is Detected during Status Confirmation Using the ROR Console When the network device on which changing state has occurred is a firewall or a server load balancer a In the orchestration tree select the L Platform providing services for which notification has been received from other administrator or user that an error has occurred Select the Resource List tab of the Main Panel Confirm Use Resource of Firewall List When the status of a used resource is something other than nor
314. true Uses the network resource name to select a subnet 3 Save the file 4 Restart the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to Restart the manager 8 5 3 Settings for the Simplified Reconfiguration Function The simplified reconfiguration function is a function that allows specification changes to be performed for a server when a new system is being created or when a configuration is being changed after deployment simply by selecting a server type When this function is enabled individual values cannot be changed directly To change the settings for this function perform the following procedure Refer to 8 3 14 L Platform Reconfiguration in the User s Guide for Tenant Administrators CE for details on changing the configuration Point Settings for the Simplified Reconfiguration Function can be set by Setup Wizard on the ROR Console For details of Setup Wizard refer to 3 1 Setup Wizard in the User s Guide for Infrastructure Administrators CE 1 Open the settings file in a text editor The settings file is stored in the following location Windows Manager Installation folderNRCXCTMGMMyPortalNconfigNmanagerview config xml 27 Linux Manager etc opt FJSVctmyp config managerview config xml 2 Add the following key and value enable easy reconfigure false Disables the function This is the default value This is applicable even when this key is not def
315. ttings for Sending Email This section explains how to change settings for sending an email 22 Settings for the Email Sent from Tenant Management Email sent from the tenant management will be enabled only if the tenant has set the Performing tenant management setting When an operation such as registering a tenant or adding or changing a user has been performed notification to that effect is sent to the tenant administrators tenant users and tenant email addresses within that same tenant Refer to 19 1 Settings for Sending Email in the Setup Guide CE for information on how to change settings for e mail sent from tenant administrators Settings for Email Sent from the L Platform Management Window Email sent from the L Platform management window notifies the end or failure of processing to the tenant administrators and the tenant users when the tenant users have used the ROR Console to perform an application to use L Platform an L Platform modification or an application to cancel L Platform Refer to 19 1 Settings for Sending Email in the Setup Guide CE for information on how to change settings for email sent from the L Platform Management window Email Sent from the Usage Charge Calculator Email will be enabled if the calculator for charges is used A usage charge file is sent to the set email address with the monthly usage charges for each tenant Refer to 19 1 4 Email Sent from the Usage Charge Calculator in the Setu
316. two settings are required in order to perform periodic execution of backup Settings for periodic execution of base backup Setting for periodic execution of WAL file save ee000602020900060600299290092999 e000602090209000090009920090090909290929099090000900990929909909000090990992009090090909990000920999299 If this procedure has been used to start batch files using the Task Scheduler a command prompt is displayed while the batch files are being executed Do not close this command prompt When an error occurs at periodic execution of online backup a message with the error code 67198 will be output to the log files If the occurrence of errors is being monitored use software for monitoring the log files to monitor this error message For details on the error message refer to Message number 67198 in Messages 0606060600020909000000909920990900000009009000009090909090909000009090090990900900090900909090000009099099000000909900000000909290909000000909299 Settings for Periodic Execution of Base Backup Specify settings so that a base backup is taken periodically Use Windows Task Scheduler as a mechanism for periodically executing commands Refer to Windows Help for information on how to set the Task Scheduler This section describes an example of a setup procedure for implementing a backup at 3 00 a m on the 1st of every month 1 From the Windows Start menu select Administrative Tools Task Scheduler to start the Task S
317. ty Design in the Design Guide CE Replication of Storage Unit LUNs If disk resources are automatically generated from virtual storage replication may be automatically set depending on the settings in the mirroring definition file Replication settings use REC for CCM machine to machine copying transfer mode Stack mode so copy groups or pairs are automatically generated The name of the generated copy group will be the value entered in the mirroring definition file Replication Definition Files When replication using CCM is set a replication definition file can be generated by executing the rcxrepdef command For details on the rcxrepdef command refer to 5 22 rcxrepdef in the Reference Guide Command XML CE When Performing Switchover from Operating to Standby Failover The procedure for switchover is the same as that for when a LUN is created in the storage unit beforehand amp Note The disk resources created using dynamic LUN mirroring are not deleted when failover to the standby node occurs 09009006000000909099299909909000000090999099092099090000009090909902282099090900000009099999099099900000009999909099900000009099999 m Information Start to copy using REC transfer mode Stack mode for CCM for the dynamic LUN mirroring Stop the replication function using the procedure described in step 5 in the same way as follows Use the acec suspend command by specifying the force option to forcibly suspend the REC session
318. ulation is repeated according to the number of data disks L Platform usage fee the estimated price monthly template price monthly price for all L Server monthly price for all data disks Template monthly price template unit price converted monthly price Virtual L Server monthly price image unit price converted monthly converted CPU unit price monthly converted price CPU clock unit price CPU clocks converted monthly price number of CPUs memory unit price amount of memory converted monthly price Physical L Server monthly price image unit price converted monthly converted CPU unit price monthly converted price CPU clock unit price CPU clocks converted monthly price number of CPUs 117 memory unit price amount of memory converted monthly price Data disk monthly price disk unit price amount of disk monthly converted price If the price is hourly basis usage fee the estimated price is calculated for 24 hours 30 days If the price is yearly basis usage fee the estimated price is twelfth of that price Usage fee the estimated price is rounded to nearest hundredths of dollar cent when displayed 15 2 2 Accounting Information File Format The accounting information of L Platform templates is written to the accounting information file The format of accounting information file is as follows Character code is UTF 8 Each column is separated by a comma Comme
319. unction and memory capacity may become unusable In order to not exceed the capacity physically held by the host operating system when creating a non global zone it is possible to ensure the functionality of the allocated amount in the non global zone by allocating CPU and memory However if used for development environments or if non global zones which exceed the physical CPU and physical memory are created it is not possible to ensure the allocated amount of functionality If CPU and memory are made the subject of charges in environments where the allocated functionality cannot be ensured consider setting the CPU and memory unit prices at lower prices than normal Asit may not be possible to ensure the functionality of allocated amounts of CPU and memory if overcommit is enabled in cases such as where L Platform import from related L Servers is performed using VMware and Hyper V as virtual software give some consideration to price settings 0606060606002099060006000090909099090000909099090900000909290900909000090990909090000099090990900000090990909000000090992920000000990006060060092929 The usage fee the estimated price displayed on the L Platform management window and others is calculated as follows 116 L Platform price template ver tual L Server physical L Server data disk monthly charges approximate 2 00 4723 101 95 8 06 15900 EcoServer 0012 how Server pool name ServerPoot1 10195 The above calc
320. unting Windows Manager GUI operations from Installation_folde RCXCTMG Charging log charging_audit log the ROR Console Linux Manager var opt FJS Vctchg log charging audit log Accounting Published API operation Windows Manager Installation foldeNRCXCTMQGNChargingVog accounting audit log Linux Manager var opt FJS Vctchg log accounting audit log Access Control Windows Manager Installation foldeNRCXCTMQGNSecurityManagementMog ctac audit log Linux Manager var opt FJS Vctsec log ctac audit log System condition Windows Manager Installation_folde SWRBAM CMDB FJS Vcmdbm var log audit uigui cmdb_audit log Linux Manager lopt FJS Vcmdbm var log audit uigui cmdb audit log Procedure for changing the file size and the number of generations held By default audit log files are rotated when they reach 10 MB To change the maximum size of audit log files or the maximum number of generations held perform the following procedure 1 Stop the manager Refer to 2 1 Starting and Stopping the Manager for information on how to stop the manager 2 Edit the appropriate items in the following definition files Definition files Definition file Windows Manager Installation foldeNRCX CTMQGNconf auditsecalog4j xml Tenant management GUI Linux Manager operations from the ROR Console Tenant management creating users from the ROR Console Provisional account registration method A
321. urce Management CE 2 Create a System Image Backup For local boot servers create a system image backup when possible For details on backing up system images refer to Chapter 16 Backup and Restore in the User s Guide VE In SAN boot environments the boot disk can be restored without having to back up and restore a system image 57 3 Power OFF Shut down the server to replace if it is still powered on For details on shutting down servers refer to Chapter 14 Power Control in the User s Guide VE 4 Replace the Server Replace the server Use the Maintenance Wizard of the Management Board Web UI to perform replacement For details on the Maintenance Wizard refer to the PRIMEQUEST manual Also change the BIOS settings of the replacement server to match the operating environment For details on BIOS settings refer to 8 2 Configure the Server Environment in the Design Guide CE Shut down the server after completing BIOS settings 5 Re configure Hardware Properties after Replacement After replacing the server re configure Resource Orchestrator with the latest hardware properties For details on how to re configure hardware properties refer to 9 3 1 Reconfiguration of Hardware Properties 6 Restore the Boot Disk Local Boot There is no need to restore the boot disk if the original disk is installed on the replaced server Simply power on the replacement server If the boot disk was replaced and a system
322. urce pool The Solaris Containers resource pool used in the global zone and the non global zone Solaris Containers Solaris server virtualization software On Solaris servers it is possible to configure multiple virtual Solaris servers that are referred to as a Solaris Zone Solaris Zone A software partition that virtually divides a Solaris OS space SPARC Enterprise Partition Model A SPARC Enterprise model which has a partitioning function to enable multiple system configurations separating a server into multiple areas with operating OS s and applications in each area Spare server A server which is used to replace a failed server when server switchover is performed storage blade A blade style storage device that can be mounted in the chassis of a blade server storage management software Software for managing storage units storage resource Collective term that refers to virtual storage resources and disk resources storage unit Used to indicate the entire secondary storage as one product surrogate pair A method for expressing one character as 32 bits In the UTF 16 character code 0xD800 OxDBFF are referred to as high surrogates and OXDCOO0 OxDFFF are referred to as low surrogates Surrogate pairs use high surrogate low surrogate switchover state The state in which switchover has been performed on a managed server but neither failback nor continuation have been performed system administ
323. ve Actions when a Problem Occurs during L Platform Operation Infrastructure Tenant L Platform Operation Problem Occurrence Investigation Investigation Problem Cause Request Request Investigation Corrective Action L Platform Reporting of Reporting of Re operation Investigation Results Investigation Results The tenant user performs L Platform creation modification or deletion or network device configuration or modification 2 Problem Occurrence L Platform creation modification or deletion or network device configuration or modification ends abnormally 3 Investigation Request The tenant user requests investigation of the cause of the operation failure by the tenant administrator When requesting investigation provide detailed information about the failed operation or output message The tenant administrator provides the information obtained from the tenant user to the infrastructure administrator and requests investigation of the cause of the operation failure 4 Problem Cause Investigation Based on the information obtained from the tenant administrator the infrastructure administrator investigates problems with the script configuring the network devices the hardware or the communication route 5 Corrective Action The infrastructure administrator performs the following corrective actions When there are errors in the script configuring the network device the infrastructu
324. w Resource Orchestrator esssssssssseeeeeeeennee nennen 174 decus d LG M E E B 1 Types of Metering Logs H2 Output Contents of Metenne Lgs oerte titt eden nere dass este et ree tenerte e t REDE Rd s 179 pos uis dio cru d bind MR 184 BA Dorset Metering ti me 187 o c M 188 Xii Part 1 Overview Chapter 1 Overview of Operations Maintenance and Monitoring Chapter 1 Overview of Operations Maintenance and Monitoring This chapter provides an overview of operation maintenance and monitoring of Resource Orchestrator For additional information on the operation maintenance and monitoring of this product refer to the configuration information in the Setup Guide CE Flow of Service Provision Using Applications The flow of service provision using applications in an environment where Resource Orchestrator has been installed is as shown below Figure 1 1 Flow of Service Provision Using Applications Usage Application Approve Options 4 Deploy L Platforms Configur Applications Configure Firewall SLB Settings Note Necessary when using firewalls Firewall server load balancers SLB or L2 switches 1 Application for use The tenant user applies to use an L Platform For details refer to 5 2 Subscribe to an L Pla
325. when necessary Notational Conventions The notation in this manual conforms to the following conventions When using Resource Orchestrator and the functions necessary differ due to the necessary basic software OS it is indicated as follows iii Physical Servers Sections related to physical servers VM host Sections related to Windows Server 2008 with VMware or Hyper V enabled Unless specified otherwise the blade servers mentioned in this manual refer to PRIMERGY BX servers Oracle Solaris may also be indicated as Solaris Solaris Operating System or Solaris OS References and character strings or values requiring emphasis are indicated using double quotes Window names dialog names menu names and tab names are shown enclosed by brackets Button names are shown enclosed by angle brackets lt gt or square brackets The order of selecting menus is indicated using Text to be entered by the user is indicated using bold text Variables are indicated using italic text and underscores The ellipses in menu names indicating settings and operation window startup are not shown The gt used in Windows is included in usage examples When using Linux read gt as meaning The URLs in this manual were correct when the manual was written Menus in the ROR console Operations on the ROR console can be performed using either the menu bar or pop up
326. z tenant name of the tenant that has been deleted gt 3 updateOrg Update tenant With no calculation of Usage Charges 2 3 information orgid lt tenant name of the tenant that has been my nn updated amp orgnamez tenant name gt my n amp mail xxx com amp globalpool lt g obal pool that has been set With calculation of Usage Charges m orgidz tenant name of the tenant that has been m created gt amp orgnamez tenant name amp mailz xxx com amp globalpool has been set amp cutoffdate lt Cut off mn lt global pool that date amp accountingmail mm email address where usage charges are sent listOrg Get a list of tenant information Tenant createUser Create users userid lt user ID of the user created amp mailz xxx 9 com management amp lastname lt ast name gt amp firstname first creating name amp auth tenant user 150 Operation type Operation information 1 users from amp explanation xxxx amp corporatename fujitsu the ROR amp emergencymail yyy com amp emergencytel 0000 Console Provisional account registration method Accounting updatePMaster Update product None master listPMaster Get a list of product None master n updateMlogSch Update periodic log usez yeslno amp time m time of output of periodic schedule

Fujitsu J2X1-7611-03ENZ0 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents